
>J 









^- , f ■ 


















'4 ^ .r 1 






- <^.-'- 




'*■." ^' 




"S'- 


/'•f * 


.':^V 


'• 


a-fC. 


• - , • ■ "' 




ft 


•*^V 4* 








.^^J'",- 




/. 




'-ft 


.- --"* 


,,-,'• 




'■ 


' < ■' ■ 


, *'/ 


'"'•'.' 


■^ 




T ,4 V 












*.*■.' 


• < '■* ■ 


■' v"' 


-■/. 


r ■*: 


-♦■-•v 


* ■ 




^f..- 




•;'' ■■ 




!-■ .•' , 


,:•'.?.. 




.- ' "' 


* 






,■;■'.". 


4 








l?>- 




4 . a 


■' *■ ' " ' 1 






» 


^ 






,* 


.'--• . t 




« ' 




•'''.' 












A'*"' 


♦."^f ■ 


:.' 1 






.-> '■ 






.'-*'; 





,4t .'•'•'* 




\ N. 



W^ 





o-/ 



/ 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



ITALIAN LANGUAGE 



COMPILED BY THE 



KET DON Ai^BOSCHI. 



♦» 



FOURTH HmVIOIV* 



FLORENCE 

AT THE author' s Casino dei Nobili, a/itf AT BlOLiivi's LIBRART Archibusieri St. 



AT PIALE's library 

Piazza di Spagna. 

A Key to this Grammar is also published. 



AT DETKEN S LIBRARY 

Portico di S. Francesco di Paola. 



1850. 




7-, ^ ! 






Florence. — Printed by Felix Le Monnicr. 



a 



TO TBE 



RIGHT HON. LORD FARNHAM 

&C. kc. &LC. 



-■>&-o~ — 



The grateful remembrance of your generous patron- 
age imposes on me the pleasing duty of offering for your 
perusal this new edition of my Italian grammar, and en- 
courages me to hope the improvements therein may not be 
unworthy of your notice. 

Should it be honoured with your Lordship's kind 
approbation, 1 shall regard it as a pledge of the success that 
has attended my former efforts. 

1 have the honour to be 

Your Lordship's 



Most Obedient Humble Servant 

Don AIMTONIO BOSCHI. 



¥\oYt\\ce. M.axc)\ \, \§^0. 



TO THE 



Every one about to publish a book, is accustomed 
to commence with a preface, in which he chiefly re- 
commends it , if not for its originality , at least for its 
order and clearness, in preference to other works of the 
same kind. Should I do so? It would be contrary to my 
opinion. Whatever may be the merits of my book, I 
leave them to the decision of those for whose use I have 
written it. To recommend it would be of no avail, 
if it had no merit; and on the contrary a pompous 
preface would not add to the value of the work. 

I beg to assure my English Readers that, whatever 
judgment they may pass upon my treatise, my only aim 
has been to assist them in overcoming the difficulties of 
one of the richest and most copious languages, the lan- 
guage of poetry and song ; and also to endeavour to 
facilitate its acquisition at the least expense of time and 
labour. An impartial Public will judge whether I have 
attained my end or not. 

In the mean time I feel assured that my motive in 
writing this work will be approved of, and my intention 
at least will be considered laudable. This alone is suffi- 
cient for me, and therefore 1 feel amply rewarded for 
my time and trouble. 



ITALIAN ALPHABET 



AKD 



i?]a.®snisr(saivaa©sr< 











Exampl. 


Meanings 


A as 


heard 


in Father, Balh 


Mam 


Hand. 


B 




» 


Bell, Bit 


Bello 


Beautiful. 


C (1) 




)) 


Chain, Church 


Cena 


Supper. 


D 




)) 


Dare, Din 


DesUno 


Fate 


E is open 










and close. 








Open 




)) 


Let, Fair 


Pesca 


Peach, 


Close 




» 


Pain, Feint 


Legge 


Law. 


F 




)) 


Effeminate 


Infermo 


Sick. 


G(2) 




)) 


Gem, Gin 


Genie 


People. 


H(3) 












I 




)) 


See, Me 


Vino 


Wine. 



(1) C before a, o, u or a consonant sounds like Ihe k in Jiin: as, caio, 
dear J colore, colour; aira, carej Crista ^ Christ. Before e and i il retakes its 
primitive sound of ck. 

"VVlien it is preceded by s and followed jjy e or i, it sounds like sh in 
dish: as, pesce, a Gsh^ ambascia, shortness of breath. But when followed by 
a, o, u or a consonant, it retakes the sound of h: as, esca, baitj nascoj I am 
born; scitre, an ax; ascrivo, I ascribe. 

(2) G before the vowels a^ Oj u or a consonant is pronounced as in 
English in the same combination of letters: as, gamhaj a leg; golaj throat; 
gusto J laste; gloria j glory. Before e and i it retakes the usual sound of g 
in gem. 

(3) jffhas no sound in the Italian language. It is found before four persons 
of the present Indicative of the Verb Avere^liO have, viz. ho^ I have; liaij 
thou hast; ha_, he has; liannOj they have, which serves only to make them 
pronounced with a grave accent. In the InLerjeclions ah! oh I eh } it gives llic 
vowel a protracted sound. "When il is placed between the c-Cj c-ij or g-Cj g-i 
it has a hard sound, as in bardwj boats; pochij few; piaghcj wounds; prcghij 
prayers . 







Esasnpl< 


Meaning* 


J as y is heard \ 


in Yell 


Aiuto 


Assistance. 


L » 


Elephant 


Ellesponto 


Hellespont. 


M » 


Emblem 


Eminenle 


Eminent. 


N » 


Entry 


Enlrare 


To enter. 


is open 


- 






and close. 








Open » 


Blot, Stop 


Sodo 


Solid. 


Close » 


Stone, Note 


Tomba 


A tomb. 


P » 


Pedlar 


Perire 


To perish. 


Q before wa » 


Quadrant 


Quadro 


A picture. 


before ue, 








ui. )) 


Quell, Quill 


Quello 


That. 


R » 


Erect 


Erg ere 


To erect. 


S » 


Essence 


Essere 


To be. 


T » 


Tell 


Nalio 


Native. 


U )) 


Fool 


Fune 


A rope. 


V » 


Vain 


Velo 


A veil. 


z » 


Chintz 


Zelo 


Zeal. 




LESSON 


I. 





FARTS OF SFEECH. 

The parts of speech are eight, viz. 

Noun, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, declinable; Adverb, 
Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection, indeclinable. 

A Noun is the name of whatsoever thing or being 
we discourse of. 

Nouns are divided into Nouns substantive and Nouns 
adjective. 

KOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 

Are of two sorts, proper and common. The former 
are the names of persons and places: as, Guglielmo, 
William; Inghilterra, England. The latter are the names 
of kinds or species: as, uomo, man; animale, animal. 



5 



GENDERg. 

There are only two genders in Italian; masculine 
and feminine. It is very difficult for the grammarian to 
lay down precise rules for determining the genders of 
nouns in Italian. The following general rules will be 
found sufficient. 

The final vow el determines the genders of nouns. 

Nouns in a are of the feminine gender: as, scatola, 
a box. Except names, vocations and titles of men: as, 
Andrea, Andrew; poeta, a poet; Duca, a Duke, and some 
nouns derived from the Greek: as, 



Anagy-amma 

Analema 

Assioma 

CUma 

Diadema 

Dilemma 

Diploma 

Dogma 

Emblema 

Enigma 

Epigramma 

Fanl'isma 



Anagram. 

Anathema. 

Axiom. 

Climate. 

Diadem. 

Dilemma. 

Diploma. 

Dogma. 

Emblem. 

Enigma. 

Epigram. 

Phantom. 



Jdioma 

Pianela 

Poema 

Problema 

Proclama 

Programma 

Scisma 

Sislema 

Sofisma 

Slemma 

Slrallagemma 

Tema 



Idiom. 

Planet. 

Poem. 

Problem. 

Proclamation. 

Prospectus. 

Schism. 

System. 

Sophism. 

Coat of arms. 

Stratagem. 

Theme. 



Some few nouns vary their gender as they vary 



their meanings. 



Dramma. 
Tema. . . 
Marstine. 



Drama, is masculine. 

Dram-weighl, is feminine. 

Theme, is masculine. 

Fear, is feminine. 

Cuticle of a wound, is feminine. 

Brink, or margin, is masculine. 



^ , \ Innkeeper, is masculine. 

/ Army, is feminir 



Army, is feminine. 



- 6 - 

The names of cities, towns, and provinces ending in 
a are feminine: as, Roma, Rome; Siena. Sienna, etc. 
If they have any other termination, they are of both 
genders: as, // brillante Parigi, or la brillante Parigi, 
Deh'ghtful Paris — 11 bel Firenze, or la bella Firenze, 
Fair Florence. 

All names of empires, kingdoms, provinces and rivers 
are feminine, when Ihey terminate in a: as, La Russia, 
Russia; la Lomhardia, Lombardy; la Germania, Ger- 
many etc. and masculine, if they end in any other 
vowel: as, // Portogallo, Portugal; il Tamigi, the Tha- 
mes; il Piemonte, Piedmont etc. 

Nouns in e are some masculine and some feminine. 

Nouns in me are masculine: as, costume^ custom: 
except fame, hunger; speme, hope. 

Nouns in re are masculine: as, timore, fear: except 
febbre, fever; coUre, coverlet; polvere, dust; scure, ax; 
iorre, tower, which are feminine. Also arbore, tree; aere, 
air; folgore, thunderbolt; /epre, hare; cenere, ashes; car- 
cere, prison, which are common to both genders. 

Nouns in nte are masculine: as, monte, mountain; 
except mente, the mind; corrente, current; sorgente, 
source; gente, people (feminine); fronte, forehead; fonle, 
fountain, (common.) 

Fine, end; tram, a beam, are common. 

Nouns in i are feminine: as, metropoli, metropolis; 
except barbagianni, owl; brindisi, toast (in drinking); 
Tamigi, Thames; dl, day, and its compounds; eclissi, 
eclipse; and numerals ending in i: as, died, ten; quin- 
dici, fifteen etc. 

Genesi, genesis, is of both genders. 

Nouns in o are masculine, except mano, a hand, and 
names and titles of women : as, Saffo, Sapho. 

Names of trees end mostlv in o of the masculine 



gender, whilst the fruit ends in a of the feminine: as, 
pero^ the pear-tree; /?er«, the pear. The following nouns 
however mean the tree and the fruit: \iz. fico, porno, 
arancio, cedro, the fig, the apple, the orange, the cedar. 
Noce, the walnut-tree is masculine; noce, a walnut is 
feminine. 

Nouns in u are feminine: as, gioventu, youth; except 
Peru. 

NUSSBER. 

Nouns tiave two numbers : the singular and the plu- 
ral. The singular speaks of one object: as, padre, father; 
the plural of more than one: as, padri, fathers. 

The general rules for the formation of the plural are 
the following. 

All nouns masculine in a change the a into i: as, 
poeta, a poet; poeti, poets; profeta, a prophet; profeii, 
prophets. 

All nouns feminine in a form their plural in e: as, 
regina, queen; regine, queens; foresta, a forest; foresle, 
forests. 

Nouns ending in ca and ga, of whatsoever gender, 
require an h in the plural before the final vowel: as, 
monctrcflf, monarch; monarchi, monarchs; lega,Si league; 
leghe, leagues. 

Nouns in cia and gia, without accent on the i, change 
the ia into e: as, minaccia, threat; minacce, threats; 
spiaggia, shore; spiagge, shores. When the i is accented 
they follow the general rules: as, magia, incantation; 
magie, incantations. 

All nouns ending in e and a, of whatsoever gender, 
form their plurals in i: as, principe, prince; principi, . 
princes; lezione, lesson; lezioni, lessons; cavallo, horse; 
cavalli, horses; mano, hand; mani, hands — Those in ic 
have no variation in their j)lurals : as, specie, species; 



— 8 — 

requie, rest; superficie, surface; barbarie, cruelty; pro- 
genie, progeny; serie, series; effigie, eflSgy. 

Nouns ending in ajo and ojo form their plural either 
by suppressing the final o, or in ai and oi: as, calamojo, 
inkstand; calamaj or calamai, inkstands; vassojo, salver; 
vassoj or vassoi, salvers. 

Vomo, man; moglie, wife; bue, an ox; mille, thousand, 
make uomini, mogli, buoi, mila. 

Nouns in io long, make ii: as, mormono, murmur; 
mormorii^ murmurs. In io short, they make ii or j: as, • 
tempio, temple; tempii or tempj, temples. 

D/o, God, makes Dei, Gods, but in poetry Dii is 
also used for the plural. 

Nouns ending in cio, chio, gio, glio; form their plural 
by suppressing the final o; as, cacio, cheese; caci, cheeses; 
ciliegio, cherry-tree; ciliegi, cherry-trees; occhio, eye; 
ocelli, eyes; figlio, son; figli, sons. 

Nouns in co and go, of two syllables, make their plu- 
rals in chi and ghi: as, luogo, place; luoghi, places; fico, 
fig; fichi, figs; except porco, pig; greco, greek, which 
make porci, greci. When they consist of more than two 
syllables, and when the co and go are immediately pre- 
ceded by a vowel, they take no h: as, amico, friend; 
amici, friends. 

The following, however, are exceptions, admitting 
the h in the formation of their plural. 



Anlico 


ancient. 


Dialog 


dialogue. 


Aprico 


sunny. 


Dimenlico 


forgetful. 


Beccajico 


becafico. 


Fondaco 


warehouse. 


Carico 


load. 


Impiego 


employment 


Cadaco 


perishable. 


Inlrigo 


intrigue. 


Casligu 


punishment. 


Manico 


handle. 


Calalogo 


catalogue. 


Ohbligo 


obligation. 



— 9 — 



Opaco 


opaque. 


Ripiego 


expedient. 


Parroco 


curate. 


Sacrilego 


sacrilegious 


Presago 


predicter. 


Salvalico 


wild. 


Prodigo 


prodigal. 


Scarico 


unloading. 


Prologo 


prologue. 


Traffico 


traffic. 


Pudico 


chaste. 


Ubriaco 


drunk. 


Bammarico 


sorrow. 







When they are preceded by another consonant they 
make their plurals in chi and ghi: as, bifolco, ploughman; 
bifolchi, ploughmen; albergo, inn; albet^ghi, inns. 

Some may be written indifferently with or without h 
in their plural: as, astrologo, astrologer; astrologi or 
astrologhi, astrologers; analogo, analogous; analogic or 
analoghi; Dialogo, dialogue; dialogi or dialoghi, dialogues; 
mendico, mendicant; mendici, or mendichi, mendicants. 

Some words have two terminations in the singular: 
as, cavalier e or cavalier o, a knight; barbiere or barbiero, 
a barber; straniere or straniero, a stranger-, sentiere or 
sentiero, a path. 



The following is a list of those nouns in o which 
form their plural in a, and are masculine in the singular 
and feminine in the plural. 

Cenlinaio a hundred 
a thousand 
mile 

a measure for corn 
bushel 



Migliaio 

Miglio 

Moggio 

Slaio 

Paio 

Uovo 



pair 

egg 



cenlinaia 


hundreds. 


migliaia 


thousands. 


miglia 


miles. 


moggia 





slaia 


bushels. 


paia 


pairs. 


uova 


eggs. 



Others also in o form their plurals both in * and a, 
the former are masculine, and the latter feminine. 

Anello ring anelU and anella. 

Braccio arm bracci » hraccia. 



— 10 — 



Budello 


bowel 


budelli 


and budella. 


Calcagno 


heel 


calcagni 


» 


calcagna. 


Carro 


carl 


carri 


)) 


carra. 


Caslello 


castle 


caslelli 


)) 


caslella. 


Ciglio 


eyebrow 


cigli 


)) 


ciglia. 


Cor no 


horn 


corni 


» 


coma. 


Dilo 


finger 


dili 


» 


dila. 


Filo 


thread 


fili 


» 


fila. 


Fondamento 


foundation 


fondamenti 


» 


fondamenta 


FruUo 


fruit 


frulli 


» 


frulla. 


Fuso 


spindle 


fust 


)) 


fusa. 


Geslo 


deed 


gesii 


» 


gesla. 


Ginocchio 


knee 


ginocchi 


» 


ginocchia. 


Grido 


cry 


gridi 


)) 


grida. 


Lahhro 


lip 


lahbri 


)) 


labbra. 


Lenzuolo 


sheet 


lenzuoli 


» 


lenzuola. 


Membro 


limb 


membri 


)) 


membra. 


Muro 


wall 


muri 


» 


mura. 


Osso 


bone 


ossi 


)) 


ossa. 


Quadrello 


dart 


quadrelli 


)) 


quadrella. 


Riso 


laugh 


risi 


» 


visa. 


Sacco 


bag 


sacchi 


» 


sacca. 


Vestigia 


vestige 


vesLigi 


)) 


vestigia. 


Veslimenlo 


raiment 


vcslimenli 


» 


veslimenta. 



t 



Monosyllables remain unchanged in the plural; as, 
gru, a crane; re, a king, likewise all nouns accented on 
the last vowel: as, tribii, tribe; castitd, chastity, and all 
nouns in i: as, ecUssi, ecclipse; tesi, a theme. 

Some nouns are used only in the plural: as, annalij 
annals: calzoni, trowsers; esequie, funeral rites; fasti, 
deeds; forbid ^ scissors; lari, lares; nozze^ wedding; ro~ 
striy beaks; spezie^ drugs; vanni, (poet, for ali) wings. 



11 — 



LESSON II. 



ABTICLE. 



The article is a word placed before a noun to show 
how far its signification extends. 

DBFXHZTE ARTICLE. 

The definite article the is expressed by il, lo, la^ 
which are declined as follows. 

i Nominative il lo la The. 

^ \ Genitive del dello della Of the. 

I, < Dative al alio alia To the. 

^ I Accusative il lo la The. 

I Ablative dal dallo dalla From the. 

Nominative 1 gli le The. 

^ . Genitive dei or de' degli delle Of the. 

s { Dative ai or a' agli alle To the. 

Accusative i gli le The. 

Ablative dai or da' dagli dalle From the. 

II is placed before a masculine- noun beginning with 
a simple consonant; as, II padre, The father; I padri, 
The fathers — // maestro, The master; / maestri, The 
masters. ' 

Lo is prefixed 1. To nouns of the masculine gender 
beginning with an s united with another consonant, 4—-" 
which is called in Italian 5 impura: as, Lo studio. The 
study; Gli studii, The studies — '2. To nouns beginning 
with a z: as, Lo zio, The uncle; Gli zii, The uncles 
— 3. To nouns beginning with a vowel, in which case 
it suffers an elision of the o in the singular, but never 



^ 



— 12 



in the plural, except before an i: as, V amove, The love; 
Gli amori, The loves — Vidolo, The idol; Gl*idoli, The 
idols. 

Dei, Gods is an exception and takes gli in the plu- 
ral: as, Gti Dei, degli Dei, etc. 

La is prefixed to feminine nouns: as, La Stella, The 
star. This article is contracted or not in the singular 
before a vowel, but always before an a, and in the plu- 
ral before an e only: as. La industria or V induslria. The 
industry— X'amica, The friend; Ze amiche, The friends — 
L'epoche, The epochs. 

The prepositions Con, With — In, In — Per, For — Su, 
Upon, when followed by the article, are joined in the 
following way. 



Wilh the is 
express- 
ed by. 



In the. 
For the. 
On the. 



If wilh the 
article 

II 

Sing* Plur> 

Col Color Co' 



Nel Nei or Ne' 
Pel Pei or Pe' 
Sul SuiorSu' 



If wilh the 
article 



Lo 



?Iur. 



Cogli 



Singa 

Collo 

or 
Con lo Con gli 
Nello Negli 
Per lo Per gli 



Sullo 



Sugli 



// with the 
article 

La 

Singe Flur* 

CoUa CoUe 

or 
Con la Con le 
Nella Nelle 
Per la Per le 
Sulla Sulle 



With the book, Col libro — With the noise, Collo slre- 
pilo — Wilh the box, Colla scatola. 

In the field, Nel campo — In the study, Nello studio — In 
the room, Nella camera. 

For the favour. Pel favore — For the mistake, Per lo sba- 
glio — For the glory. Per la gloria. 

On the carpet, Sul lappeto— On the rock, Sallo scoglio — 
On the table, Sulla tavola. 



13 



The prepositions Di, A, Da correspond with the 
English prepositions Of, 2o, From. 



EXAMPIiES. 



Di Londra 
A Londra 
Da Londra 



Of London 
To London 
From London 



Before a vowel cf/ suffers an elision : 
as, D^ Andrea J Of Andrew — A be- 
comes ad: as, Ad Andrea, To An- 
drew, and da remains to distinguish 
the Ablative from Ihe Genitive : as , 
Da Andrea, From Andrew. 



The deflnite article in Italian is employed both in a 
general and individual sense: as, I Re sono di raro felici, 
Kings are seldom happy — Ecco V uomo che tanto vi 
piacef Here is the man whom you like so much. 

When, however, we ascribe the possession of virtues 
or vices or characteristic qualities to particular persons 
or things, we must omit the article: as, John has cour- 
age, but not discretion, Giovanni ha coraggio, ma non 
discrezione. 

Names of countries, empires, kingdoms, provinces, 
rivers etc. taken in their full extent, require the definite 
article: as, Egli ha scorso Y Italia, la Francia e V In- 
ghilterra, He travelled over Italy, France and England. 
But when a personal title precedes, the simple prepo- 
sition is used: as. La regina d' Inghillerra, The Queen 
o/" England — II Granduca di Toscana, The Grand Duke 
of Tuscany. 

The definite article is suppressed before names of 
persons, of towns, and also of countries not taken in 
their full extent: as, Ecco ^n^omo, Here is Anthony — 
Andremo oggi a Firenze, We will go to-day to Florence 
— Egli viene d' Italia di Francia e d^ Inghilierra, He 
comes from Italy, France, and England — Ella nacque 

2 



^■ 



_ 14 — 

in Ger mania, She was born in Germany. But when an 
adjective or the words Signore, Mr. Signora, Mrs. Si- 
gnorina, Miss, intervene, the definite article is expressed: 
as, Ecco il Signor Antonio, Here is Mr. Anthony — 
Andremo oggi alia bella Firenze, We will go to-day 
to fair Florence — Ho veduto la Signorina Wells , 
I have seen Miss Wells — // voslro amico nacque nella 
florida Spagna, Your friend was born in flourishing 
Spain. 

It is prefixed to family names: as, II Petrarca, Pe- 
trarch — II Tasso, Tasso etc. and to personal titles fol- 
lowed by proper names: as. La iJe^ma Yittoria, Queen 
Victoria — II generate Wellington, General "Wellington. 
But when the proper name precedes the title, and is 
followed by the country, the article is omitted: as, 
Victoria Queen of England, Vittoria Regina d' Inghil- 
terra. 

The definite article is sometimes placed between 
the noun and adjective, as may be often seen in Boc- 
caccio: as, Ginevra la hella. The beautiful Gine- 
vra etc. 

It is also placed before an adjective used substantive- 
ly: as, II grande. The great — II sublime , The sublime 
— U utile, The useful etc. 

The Infinitives of Verbs used instead of nouns are 
preceded by the masculine article : as, II mangiare. To 
/ eat — Lo studiare. To study — Uascoltare, To listen: Ex. \ 
Essa vedendo che il pregare non le valeva, ricorse al mi- \ 
nacciare. Seeing that her entreaties -were of no avail, she ) 
had recourse to threats. 

The same rule applies to adverbs instead of nouns : 
as, // dove, il come, il quando, il si, il no, il mai, il 
i per che (The) where, (the) how, (the) when, (the) yes, 
/ (the) no, (the) never, (the) why. 



15 - 



EXAMPLES. 



10 sarei conlento di sapere il I should be glad to know 
quando. when. 

11 perche vi dirb. I will tell you why. 
Ella era cerla del si. She was sure of a yes. 

We Italians make use of the definite article before 
the words morning, evening, day, night, and before the 
different days of the week, whilst the English make use 
of a preposition : as , They sit up at night and sleep in 
the day, Vegliano la notte e dormono il giorno — Gali- 
gnani's Messenger is not published on a Sunday, II 
Messaggero del Galignani non si pubblica la Domenica. 

When there are several nouns of different genders 
and numbers, each one must have its separate article : 
as, II padre ed i figli, The father and sons — Collo studio 
e coUa fatica, With study and fatigue. If they are of the 
same gender and number, it is sufficient to use the ar- 
ticle before the first noun, although more elegant to 
repeat it: as, Le valli, le colline, e \e pianure instead of 
Le valli, colline e pianure, Vallies, mountains and plains. 

When a word is composed of two nouns, one of 
which is used adjectively denoting use, the first in Eng- 
lish is placed the last in Italian, governed by da: as, 
A bed-room, Una camera da letto — A wine-bottle, Unu 
hottiglia da vino. When they are used to express matter, 
quality or country, they employ di: as, A gold-ring, 
Vn anello d' oro — Madeira-wine, Vino di Madera. When 
they describe a thing according lo lis form or shape, they 
take a: as, A cylinder-watch, Vn oriuolo a cilindro. 

The definite article is usually suppressed when the 
sense of a noun conveys an absolute unlimited meaning: 
as, Onore e virtu debbono essere la guida de* generosi, 



I 



— 16 ~ 

Honour and virtue ought to be the guides of the gen- 
erous. This, however, is not to be followed as a gen- 
eral rule. 

The placed before a noun in apposition is suppress- 
ed in Italian: as, Mr. Macalister the son in law of 
Mrs. Fleming, II signor Macalister genero della signora 
Fleming, 

PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 

Del, dello , della: del, degli, delle, Some, any, mean 
a portion of a thing: as, Datemi delV acqu a, Give me 
some water — Volete della carta ? Do you want any 
paper? — Prendete dei fagioUni e del manzo, Take some 
beans and some beef. 

When some stands substantively for some people, or 
is employed adjectively, it must be expressed by alcuno, 
alcuna: alcuni, alcune. 

As some [people) say. Come alcuni dioono. 

After some heavy sighs she Dopo alcun caldo sospiro ella 

said. disse. 

Peter brought me some things. Pielro mi porto alcune cose. 

INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 

The indefinite article uno, un, una, un\ a or an, 
is used in the following way. 

Uno before a noun masculine beginning with an 5 
impura or a z: as, Uno specchio, A looking-glass — Uno 
zelo, A zeal. 

Un before a noun of the same gender beginning with 




— 17 — 

a vowel or a simple consonant: as, Un amico, A friend — 
Un castello, A castle. 

Una before a noun feminine beginning with a con- 
sonant: as, Una sorella, A sister. 

Vn' with an apostrophe before a noun of the same 
gender beginning v»^ilh a vowel : as , Un' arnica , A 
friend. 

The masculine indefinite article una or un is found 
before Infinitives taken substantively, in the same man- 
ner as we employ the definite article: as, Un mormorar 
di frondi, A murmur of leaves — Uno strepitar d' ar- 
mati, A noise of armed men. 

The English make use of a or an before nouns of 
measure and weight, but we use the definite article 
il, lo, la: as. He sells wine for two pauls a bottle, 
Egli vende il vino due paoli la bottiglia — I have bought 
corn for six pauls a bushel. Ho comprato il grano a 
sei paoli lo staio. 

When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in Ital- 
ian either by per, or by the definite article il , lo, la: 
as, So much a week, Tanto per settimana, or Tanto la 
settimana. 

The indefinite article is suppressed in Italian. 

1. After the verbs To be , To become, with a noun 
expressing the country , profession or dignity: as. He is 
an Irishman, Egli e Jrlandese — You will be a lawyer, 
Voi sarele avvocato — You will become a minister of 
Stale, Biverrete Minis tro di Slato. 

2. With a noun of the same kind after the verbs, To 
make, create, appoint, elect, choose, declare, 'proclaim, 
whatever may be the Nominative of that verb: as. The 
king made him a General, lire lofece Generale — They 
elected him a member of Parliament, Lo elessero mem- 
bro del Parlamento. 



- 18 - 

3. Before a noun in apposition: as, Lord F. a friend 
of the people, Lord F. amico del popolo. 

4. Before a title of a book: as. An English Grammar, 
Grammatica Inglese. 

5. After the pronoun which in English expresses 
admiration: as, What a fine picture ! Che bel quadro ! 



MavVs used- '\\\ \\\i "ExtTdse-s.. 



— Indicates that the word is alike in Italian and English. 

rz Indicates that the English word under which it is placed, 
is not expressed in Italian. 

( ) English words between parentheses are to be' translated 
by those placed underneath. 

The numbers placed over different words in English, show 
how the words are to be transposed in Italian. 

When two words in the same phrase are marked wilh the 
same number, they are to be expressed by one wordj as, 

I was very much afraid — Temeva molHssimo. 



QaaaQcisa i»^'^ 



Ignorance is the mother of error, wonder and prejudi- 
e 
ces of every kind— Henry the 8th. King of England was 

ogni Enrico = ollavo fu 



(1) The pupil must put the nouns in iheir right genders and numbers, 
as the singular masculine only is given. 



— 19 — 

a cruel despot — I left Mrs. Williams in France , and from 
despola lasciai — di 

2 13 

thence she will soon sail for America — The father, mother, 

Id fard vela — 

sisters, uncles, aunts and several olher relations were there 

parecchi aliri parenle erano Id 

— I perceived in her virtue, but not patience — Miss Lyte 

s cor si lei — 

always takes coffee in the morning and tea at night — Lord 

prende te — 

B. the son of the Marquis of Hastings was here ( this 

— Marchese — era qui 

2 1 

morning); perhaps the Queen (will make) him a privy 
slamane fard to 

counsellor, but I do not know when — What a beautiful 

= non so ' hclla 

2 1 

morning ! — Mr. Croser brought me a snuff-box and some 

— porlo mi lahacco 

5 4 

silver-spoons from London — It is always better to speak 

cucchiaio = parlare 

little than to speak too much — (Here is) the horse which 

che troppo Ecco cui 

Mr. Rogers has just brought from Paris — Dante pleases 

— ha lesle condoUo — 

2 3 1 

Miss Hoppner very much , she starts to-morrow for gay 
{Dal.) — assai parte allegro 

Naples. Is she an Irish Lady? No, she is an English Lady — 

Italy is the land of the fine arts — Mr. Hindley goes to Ire- 
tcrra belle va in 

2 1 

land four or five times a year — Peter gives him seven 

volta dd gli 



20 — 

2 1 



pauls a day — He sells this lace at half a guinea an ell 

questa trina mezzo ghinea auna 
— The lily is the emblem of candour , innocence and purity. 
giglio simholo 



LESSON III. 



ADS SC T I V £. 



A noun adjective requires to be joined with the 
substantive of which it shows the nature or the quality, 
and it agrees with it in gender and number. 

Adjectives end either in o or e. Those in o change 
the into a for the feminine: as, Uomo savio, A wise 
man — Bonna savia, A wise woman. Those in e are of 
both genders: as, Uomo prudente, A prudent man — 
Donna prudente^ A prudent woman — In the plural they 
follow the rules of nouns substantive. 

No precise rules can be given to determine the si- 
tuation of the adjective, whether it should be placed 
before or after the substantive. The study of the Classics 
is the only means by which accuracy can be obtained 
on this point. We,-liowever, generally place all adjectives 
after the substantives, which express colour, shape, tasle, 
and those used in speaking of the state of the air or 
weather. 

Green velvet Velluto verde. 

A round table Tavola rotonda. 

A sweet orange Un' arancia dolce. 

A damp climate Un clima umido. 



— 21 



Particular attention therefore must be given to the 
position of some adjectives, as if not, their meaning would 
be totally different. 



Un galanC uomo 
Un uomo galante 
Un gentil uomo 
Un uomo gentile 
Un pover uomo 
Un uomo povero 
Una cerla cosa 
Una cosa cerla 



means An honest man. 

» A gallant. 

» A Gentleman. 

)) A man of genteel manners. 

» An insignificant man. 

w A man in distress. 

» A certain affair. 

» A sure thing. 



When an adjective has reference to several substan- 
tives of the same gender, and is detached from them by 
a verb, it must be put in the plural and agree with 
them in gender : as, // re ed il pastor e sono eguali dopo 
la morte , The- king and the shepherd are equal after 
death. 

If however the adjective relates to several substan- 
tives of different genders, it is always put in the mascu- 
line gender and in the plural: as, 1 fratelli, e le sorelle 
furono gioiosi alVarrivo dello zio, The brothers and 
sisters were overjoyed at the arrival of the uncle. 

But in the absence of a verb, it agrees with the last 
substantive: as, // tempo e la stagione grata, The 
agreeable time and season. 



Q^QaQ33Q 2. 



(I) 



An ingenuous candour, an amiable simplicity and a 

ingenuo 



(1) The pupil must put the adjectives in their right genders and numbers, 
as the singular masculine only is given. 



— 22 — 

lively artlessness are the charms of youth — The attention 

vivace naturalezza sono incanlo gioventu 

of a mere gallant is often preferred to that of an honest 

mero sovenle preferila a quella 

man - Miss Drummond and the Misses Reynolds were always 

— — furono 

attentive to the instructions of the master — The boots and 
allenlo slivale 



2 1 



4 



shoes of John are not well cleaned — This is the proper 
Scarpa Giovanni puliLo queslo opporluno 



i 



time and place — Ignorance and self-love are equally pre- 
ora amor propria del pari 



2 1 



sumptuous — A just judge, learned and disinterested, and a 

giudice dolto disinter essato 

beautiful woman, young, virtuous and amiable are rare — 

rare 

Mrs. Douglas bought a red cloth for the square table — Here 

— compro lappelo quadralo 

one breathes a wholesome air— The prints and the pictures 

si respira slampa 

in that drawing-room are beautiful — Uprightness and piety 

quel saloUo onesld pieid 

are much esteemed even by ( wicked men ) — The love of 

assai slimalo anche {Ahl.) scelleralo [PL] 
life and the fear of death are natural to men. 
iimore 



LESSON IV. 

COMPABATXVBS AND SUP E at AT IVES. 

As adjectives express the quality of substantives, we 
may either increase or diminish their qualities in differ- 



— 23 - 

ent ways, hence arise the degrees of comparison; the 
positive, comparative and superlative. 

The positive denotes the quality of the thing abso- 
lutely : as, Ricco, Rich. 

The comparative increases, lessens or equalizes the 
quality, hence three sorts of comparison; viz. of supe- 
riority , inferiority and equality.. 

The comparative of superiority is formed in Itahan 
by the adverb pm, more, before the adjective: as, Piic 
ricco, Richer or more rich. 

That oi inferiority by the adverb meno, less: as, 
Meno ricco, Less rich. 

The comparatives better and worse are rendered in 
Italian by migliore, belter, if used adjectively, and me- 
glio, better, if adverbially, and in the same manner 
peggiore and peggio, worse. 

Than is espressed. 

1. By dely dello, delta: del, degli, delle. 

2. By di. 

3. By die, f, 

When two persons or things are compared with 
respect to some property which they both possess, but 
in different degrees, than is expressed by del, dello etc. 
or di. \ 

By del, dello etc. when the comparative is followed 
by a noun or pronoun which takes the definite article (1). 

E X A M P li E S. 

La rosa e piu hella della viola. The rose is more beautiful 

than the violet. 



I 



(1) The possessive and some indefinite pronouns admit generally of the 
de6nile article. 



— 24 — 

La primavera e piu piacevole Spring is pleasanter Ihan au- 

deWaulunno. tumn. 

Esse meritano meno compas- They are less deserving of 

sione delle altre. pity than the others. 

Pief ro e meno modeslo del vo- Peter is less modest than your 

slro amico. friend. 

11 parlare e meno' facile dello Speaking is less easy than 

scrivere. writing. 

By di, when a noun or pronoun which does not take 
the definite article follows. 

Egli e meglio disciplinaio di He is better disciplined than 

Giovanni. John. 

Noi siamo slali piu infelici di We have been more unhappy 

voi. Ihan you. 

By che, when the comparison is between two sub- 
stantives or two adjectives; between two verbs in the 
Infinitive Mood, or two adverbs referring to the same 
subject, and when it precedes a noun governed by a 
preposition. 

Es:Ampi.ES. 

Egli ha piu prudenza che co- He has more prudence than 

raggio. courage. 

Voi siele piu gaio che savio. You are more merry than 

wise. 

E meglio andarsene che reslar It is better to go away than 

qui. to remain here. 

Pielro si comporlo piu corag- Peter behaved more cour- 

giosamente che prudenle- ageously than prudently. 

menle. 

Antonio ebbe piu forluna in Anthony had more luck in 

Londra che a Parigi. London than in Paris. 



~ 23 — 

NB. When than is followed bv a verb not in the 
InOnitive Mood, it is rendered by che non: as, They i 
have less money than you think, Essi hanno meno da-\ 
naro che non credete. ^ 

In the comparative of equality the English adverbs 

As as 

So as 



^ i Tanto Quanlo 



T3 

s 

-3 



Cost Come 



As much as 

So much as 

As many as \ ^ ' ^^^^ 



So many as 



£ I Quanlo 



a 



We think it is more elegant to use quanta alone. 



E;XAraPL.ES. 



Z-a delicalezza del guslo e un Delicacy of taste is a gift of 
dono della nalura raro nature as rare as true ge- 

quanto il vero genio. nius. 

Egli non ha cavalli quanto il He has not as many horses 
voslro amico. as your friend. 

Essi lavorano quanto voi. They work as much as you. 

Much placed before a comparative is expressed by 
moUo, assai, vie, or via: as. That picture is much finer 
than this. Quel quadro e assai piii hello ^ or molto pm 
hello di questo. 

The article used with comparatives in English, is 
omitted in Itahan: as, The more difficult a thing is, the 
more honourable it is, Piu una cosa e difficile, piu essa 
e onorevole. 

SUPERLATIVE. 

The superlative increases or lessens the quality in 
the greatest degree. It is absolute and relative. The for- 
mer is not compared with any object, the latter is. 

3 



1 



— 26 — 

The superlatiye absolute is made by changing the 
last vowel of the positive into issimo, and rarely by 
placing the adverbs molto, assai before the positive: as, 
Onesto, Honest; Onestissimo, Very honest. 

The duplication of the positive sometimes has the 
force of the superlative: as, Buono buono, Very good — 
Bravo bravo, Very well. 

Adjectives in co and go requiring an h in the plural, 
take it also in the superlative: as, Lar^o, Broad ;Zar5'/i{5- 
simo, Very broad — Ricco, Rich; Ricchissimo , Very rich, 

Those in io change io into issimo: as, Savio, V/ise ; 
Savissimo, Very wise. 

The superlative relative is expressed by il piu, la 
pill etc.: as, 11 piu attivo , The most active — La piu 
bella, The handsomest. This superlative requires the 
Genitive after it: as, Maria e la piu amabile delle sorel- 
le, Mary is the most amiable of the sisters — Voi avete 
parlato col piic ricco uomo d' Jnghilterra, You have 
spoken with the richest man in England. 

Posilive. Comparative. Superlative-. 

Adjective! Adverb* 

Good buono migliore meglio ollimo, or buonissimo. 

Bad callivo peggiore peggio pessimo, or callivissimo. 

Small piccolo minor e meno minimo, or piccoUssimo. 

Great grande maggiore massimo, or grandissimo. 

Acrid acre acerrimo. 

Celebrated celebre celeherrimo. 

Salubrious salubre saluherrimo. 

Upright inlegro inlegerrimo 

Miserable misero miserrimo, or miserissimo. 



— 27 — 

Qa.QaQ(]3Q 3. 

It happens often that a man who has much wit and 

= accade che il quale abbia spirilo 

little experience is not so well received as a man who has 

t- bene ricevulo 

less wit, but who has the use of the world — She was a 

che uso mondo 

very bitter enemy of the very celebrated Miss Fleming — The 

acre nemica — 

2 1 

most able men are not always the most virtuous — You 
abile persona 

5 12 

will not see as much luxury in Berlin as in Vienna — The 

vedrele *^,____„. IM'^^o Berlino — 

love of our neighbour is as necessary in society for the hap- 

= prossimo necessario 

piness of life as in Christianity for eternal salvation — 

crislianesimo 
Mr. Hogg' s translation was worse than your' s, yet he ought 
— Iraduzione [adj.] luUavia dovrebbe 

to translate better than you: he is however much fonder of 
z=: (adv.) perb amanle 

play than study; he conceives more than he is able to do, 
gioco immagina capace di fare 

consequently the more he undertakes the less he succeeds 
per cons eguenza inlraprende riesce 

— The Po is the most considerable river in Italy — 

— ragguardevole 

Mr. Napier speaks French more easily than she does — It is as 

pai'la facilmenle lei = 

easy to do good as to do evil — In the month of January 
facile bene male ^ Gennaio 

the cold was most severe — • The style of Fenelon is very 
freddo rigido slile — 



— 28 - 

rich and harmonious — St. Peters at Rome is the most 

San Pielro 
magnificent and the most celebrated church in Europe. 
magnifico . chiesa 



LESSON V. 



CARDINAL AND OHDXNAL NUMBERS. 



Cardiual. 

1 Uno, Una. 

2 Due. 

3 Tre. 

4 Quattro. 

5 Cinque. 

6 Sei. 

7 Sette. 

8 Otto. 

9 Nove. 

10 Dieci. 

11 Undici. 

12 Dodici. 

13 Tredici. 

14 Quattordici. 

15 Quindicj. 

16 Sedici. 

17 Diciasselte. 

18 Diciotto. 

19 Diciannove. 

20 Venti. 

21 Yentuuo. 

22 Ventidue. 

23 Ventitre. 

24 Yentiquattro. 



Ordinal. 

1st. Prirao. 
2d. Secondo. 
3d. Terzo. 
4th. Quarto. 
Sth. Quinto. 
6th. Seslo. 
7th. Settimo. 
8lh. Ottavo. 
9th. Nono. 
10th. Decimo. 
lllh. Undecimo, or decimo pri- 

mo. 
12th. Duodecimo, or decimo se- 
condo. 
13th. Decimo terzo, or tredice- 

simo. 
14th. Decimo quarto, or quat- 

lordicesimo. 
15lh. Decimo quinto, oi quindi- 

cesimo. 
16lh. Decimo seslo, or sedice- 

simo. 
17th. Decimo settimo, or dicias- 
settesimo. 



~ 29 



Cardinal. 

25 Venticinque. 

26 Ventisei. 

27 Yentisette. 

28 YentoUo. 

29 Yenlinove. 

30 Tienta. 
40 Quaranta. 
50 Cinquanta. 
60 Sessanta. 
70 Settanta. 
80 Otlanta. 
90 Novanta. 

100 Cento. 
200 Dugento, or 
Duecento. 
300 Trecento. 
400 Quattrocento. 
1,000 Mille. 
2,000 Due mila. 
100,000 Cento mila. 
1,000,000 Un milione. 
2,000,000 Due milioni. 



Ordinal. 
18lh. Decimo otlavo, or diciot- 

lesimo. 
19th. Decimo nono, or dicianno- 

vesimo. 
20th. Yentesimo, or vigesimo 
21st. Yentesimo primo, or vige- 
simo primo. 
30th. Trentesimo, or trigesimo. 
40th. Quarantesimo, or quadra- 

gesimo. 
50th. Cinquantesimo , or quin- 

quagesimo. 
60th. Sessantesimo, or sessage- 

simo. 
70th. Settantesimo, or settuagti- 

simo. 
80th. Ottantesimo , or ottuagc- 

simo. 
90th. Novantesimo , or nonage- 

simo. 
100th, Centesimo. 
1000th. Millesimo. 



Un paio 
Una decina 
Una dozzina 
Una ventina 
Una trentina 
Una quarantina 
Una cinquanlina 
Un cenlinaio 
Un migliaio 
A cenlinaia 
A migliaia 
Millanta 



GOLLSCTXVE. 

a pair. 

half a score. 

a dozen. 

a score. 

to the number of Ihiriy. 

lo the number of forty. 

half a hundred. 

to the number of a hundred. 

lo the number of a thousand. 

by hundreds. 

by thousands. 

thousands upon thousands. 



30 — 



DISTRIBUTIVE. 



Ad uno ad uno one by one. 

A due a due two by two, and so on. 

Uno, una is subject to the same contraction when 
numeral, as it is when an article, but cannot be con- 
tracted at the end of a phrase : as, lo ne ho due, e voi ne 
avete uno, I have two and you have one. 

When uno and una are joined to a number, they 
require the following substantive to be in the singular : 
as , Ventun anno, Twenty-one years — Trentuna libbra, 
Thirty-one pounds. But if the article or the substantive 
is placed before the number, the plural is used: as, Vi 
mandero i ventuno scudi, I shall send you the twenty-one 
scudi — Vi mandero scudi ventuno , I shall send you 
twenty-one scudi. 

One or a before hundred or thousand , as also the 
conjunction and in the notation of years, are omitted in 
Italian: as, A hundred soldiers. Cento soldati — A thou- 
sand ships, Mille navi — In the year one thousand eight 
hundred and forty three — NeW anno mille ottocento 
quarantatre. 

The preposition m, followed in English by the date 
of the century, is rendered in Italian by nel [anno, year, 
being understood); but when the words morning, even- 
ing are preceded by the time of the day, in is expres- 
sed by delta: as. In 1843 at four in the evening, or in 
the morning, Nel mille ottocento quarantatre, alle quat- 
tro della sera, or delta mattina. 

Ordinal numbers are declinable and agree in gender 
and number with the substantive : as, Se verrete at 
ieatro mi troverete al prim' ordme , If you come to the 
theatre you will find me in the first tier — // suo ca- 



— 31 -> 

vallo vinse nella prima corsa, His horse won in the first 
race. 

In speaking of Kings, Princes etc. we suppress in 
Jtah'an the article placed in EngHsh before the ordinal 
number: as, George the fourth, Giorgio quarto. 

For the dale of the monlh we employ the ordinal 
number for the first day of the monlh, and the cardinal 
for the rest, wilh the masculine definite article il pre- 
fixed: as, 11 primo, The first — // due. The second — // 
tre, The third, and so on with cardinal numbers. 

The preposition on, employed in Enghsh before the 
date of the monlh, is suppressed in Italian, and the 
masculine article il alone used: as. On the first of July, 
or July the first, II primo di Lvglio. 

In mentioning the time of the day, we say — E 
V un^ ora. It is one o'clock — Sono le due, or due ore, 
It is two o'clock — Sono le quatlro, or quattr'ore, It is 
four o'clock. The first mode however is the best. 

The half is expressed both by mezzo and meta. The 
former is invariable after a noun, but agrees with it in 
gender when placed before. The ialter is employed when 
substantively used. 

EX AM PL, ES. 

He will go there at half past Egli vi andrd alle Ire e 

three. mezzo. 

Half a pound. • Una mezza lihbra. 

Half the world. La mela del mondo. 

Cut this pear in half. Tagliale quesla pera per melh. 

The quarter is expressed by quarto: as, I will be 
here at a quarter past five, Saro qui alle cinque ed un 
quarlo. 




— 32 — 
We say 

Fra mezz' ora. In half an hour. 

Le quattro meno un quarto. A quarter to four. 
Le set ed un quarto. A quarter past six. 

Ambo, Ambediie, both, indeclinable, and ambi, ambey 
declinable, admit of the article with substantives: as, 
AmbOy ambedue or ambi i cam, Both dogs — Ambo, am- 
bedue or ambe le mani, Both hands. 

We say Tutti e quattro. All four — Tutti e sei, All 
six, and so on, except before a vowel: as, Tutti otto and 
not Tutti e otto, All eight. 

Ago is expressed both by fa and sono: as. Two years 
ago, Due anni fa, or due anni sono. For a substantive 
singular, the Grst only is used: as, A year ago, Un anno 
fa — A week ago, Una settimana fa. 

We say 

Da oggi ad otto This day week. 

Da oggi a quindici This day fortnight. 

Da oggi a un mese This day month. 

Saturn makes his revolution in thirty years; Jupiter 
Salurno fa la sua Giovc 

in twelve; Mars in two; the Earth in one, or three hun- 

Marte Terra 

dred and sixty five days and seven hours ; Venus in two 

Venere 
hundred and twenty five days, and Mercury in three months; 

Mercurio 
the Moon, which is the satellite of the Earth (revolves round 
Luna la quale — gira intorno ad 

it) in twenty seven days, seven hours and forty three 
cssa 



— 33 — 

minutes ; but it does not overtake the Sun in less than 
minulo essa = giunge Sole 

twenty nine clays, twelve hours and forty five minutes — 
Leopold the first, Grand Duke of Tuscany, was a great 
Leopoldo 

2 1 

man — At what o' clock does the Opera begin? In half an 
che := ~ comincia 

hour ~ He died in London on the 14th. of last month — 

mori passato 

They gained the two first battles — Both Kings were crowned 
vinsero furono coronalo 

in the same year — He paid for that horse 31 guineas — 

pago = quel ghinca 

He Is certainly 41 — ( Bring me ) the twenty-one crowns 
conla anno Porlaiemi scudo 

which I lent you four months ago — Napoleon (was born) 

cui prestai m Napoleone nacque 

at Ajaccio on the 14th. of August 1769, and died at St. Helena 
in — Agoslo Elena 

on the Sth. of May 1821, and his remains were brought to 

Magglo le sue spoglia porlalo 

Paris, by the permission of the English, on the ISth. of 

col permesso 

October 1840. 
OUobre 



LESSON VI. 



variable: nouns. 



Arc of three kinds, Accrescitivi, auginentatives — Di 
minulivi, diminutives — Peggiorativi, vilifying nouns. 



- 34 



A U 6 M E N T A T X V E S . 



^ 



Are formed by changing the last vowel into one , and 
are always of the masculine gender: as, From libro, 
book: librone, a great or large book — From ca.^a, house: 
casone, a great or large house. 

If the quality should imply a slight increase of power 
or size by way of augmenting some thing in itself dimin- 
utive, in this case the adjectives end in otto, otta : ozzOf 
ozza; occio, occia, and such terminations add not only 
an idea of strength and vigour, but also of gracefulness: 
as, From giovine, young: giovinotto, a young man: 
giovinotia, a young girl— From bruno and bruna,hvovfn: 
brunozzo, a dark man: brunozza, a brunette — From 
bello and 6e//a, beautiful :6e//omo and belloccia,yfQ\\ made. 

DiraZNUTIVES. 

For the most part change the last vowel into ino, 
etto, ello: ina, etta, ella: as, From fanciuUo, a child: 
fanciuUino, a pretty dear little child — From fanciulla, 
a girl: fanciuUina, a young dear girl — From amore, 
affection: amoretio, slight attachment — From mano, 
hand: manina, a beautiful small hand. 

Those in ello, ella: etto, etla, convey a meaning not 
only of smallness, but also of affection and love, and some- 
times of contempt: as, From contadino, a country man: 
contadinello, a smart country fellow — From contadina, 
a country woman: contadinella, a pretty little country 
girl — From povero, poor man: poveretto and poverello, 
poor creature — From pazzo, a madman: pazzarello, 
mad-cap — From vecchio, an old man: vecchierello, good 
old man — From vecchia, old woman : vecchierella, poor 
old woman. 



— 33 — 

Diminutives signifying contempt have also various 
terminations: as, From cosa, thing: cosuzza and cosuc- 
cia, a trifle — From regalo , present: regaluccio and 
regaluzzOy a small present — From uomo, a man : omic- 
ciiiolo , and omiciatlolo, a siiiy man — From poeta, a 
poet: poetucciOy a rhymster — From Ulro, book: libri- 
ciattolOf an insignificant book, and lihercolo, a bad hltle 
book. 

VZZ.XFYXHG NOUNS. 

End in astro, astra: accio, accia: as, From filosofo, 
a philosopher: filosofastro , a bad or paltry philosopher 

— From giovine, a girl: giovinastra a naughty girl — 
From popolo, a people: popolaccio, mob — From casa, 
a house: casaccia, a large bad house. 

There are also some vilifying nouns ending in ame, 
ume and aglia: as, From came, meat: carname, carrion 

— From putredine, putridness: pulridume, a heap of 
rotten things — From gente, people: gentame and gen- 
taglia, rabble. 

Adverbs also admit of these modifications: as. From 
poco , little , we form pochino — From adagio softly : 
adagino — From bene, well : benino, pretty well : benone, 
very well indeed. 

QaaaQQiQa 5. 

The fortunate attachment of that smart country fellow 

amove quel 

2 1 

makes him sing every day — That young girl pleases every 

fa lo caniare ogni quella piace a 

body, she has two prelty liitle hands and two small feel 

lulli 



— 36 — 

2 I 

which charm the beholder, Mr. Sullivan made her ( the 

che incanlano spellalore — fece le 

day before yesterday) a small present — Did you see that 
jeri Vallro avele vcdulo 

poor old man with whom I spoke yesterday? No, why? I 

con cub parlai jeri — 

wanted ( to ask him ) if he had seen my little dog. Come 
voleva chiedergli aveva il mio venile 

2 

perhaps (we shall find him ) in that small hut, where that 
lo troveremo casa dove 

5 1 -2 

brunette lives who is rather w^ell made — Do not read such 

sla che = leggele tale 

1 2 1 

a bad little book. The author is not, as you think a rhym- 

credele 

2 1 5 2 1 

ster. He seems to me a bad poet — You always speak to me 
sembra a me parlale mi 

of that mad-cap, have you perhaps some slight attachment 

avele qualche 

for her? I? how much (you are mistaken) poor creature ! 
lei io qitanlo v' ingannale 

2 4 5 1 

— ( in order to ) speak a foreign language well, il is neces- 

Per = 

sary to begin very slowly — They were very much annoyed 
3= furono moleslali 

2 i 

by the rabble following I hem. 

[Abi.) che seguiva It 



— 37 - 

LESSON VII. 
PROMOUNS3 

A Pronoun is a word employed instead of a noun, 
to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same — There 
are seven kinds of Pronouns, viz. Personal, Conjunctive, 
Possessive, Demonstrative, Relative, Interrogative, and 
Indefinite. 

FEBSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Personal Pronouns are expressive of persons. When 
put in the oblique cases governed by verbs, they are 
called conjunctive. 

Pronouns of the first person are intended to signify 
the person or persons, who speak, or who are associated 
with the speaker: as, lo. I; Noi, We. 

Those of the second, signify the person or persons 
to whom the speech is addressed: as, Tu, Thou; Voi, 
You. 

Those of the third, some other person or persons 
spoken of: as, Egli, He; Ella, She; Eglino, mas. Elleno, 
fern. They. 



■ 




FIRST PERSON. 




1 






SiDgular. 




Nom. 


/ 




lo 


Cor 


Gen. 


Of me 




Di me 




Dat. 


To me 




A me 


Mi. 


Ace. 


Me 




Me 


Mi. 


Abl. 


From ' 


me 


Da me 





Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 



Nom. 



Nom. 



Dat. 
Ace. 



38 - 



Plural. 



We 




Noi 


Of us 




Di noi 


To us 




A noi 


Us 




Noi 


From 


us 


Da noi 



SSCOND PERSON. 



Plural . 



You Voi 



THISLD FBRSON. 

Sin?ular-MascHlinc. 



'o*- 



He Egli, Ei, E' 



Gen. Of him Di liii 



Conjunctive. 



Ci, or Ne. 
Ci, or Ne. 







Siugular. 




Nom. 


Thou 


Tu 




Gen. 


Of Ihee 


Dile 




Dat. 


To Ihee 


A te 


Ti 


Ace. 


Thee 


Te 


Ti 


Abl. 


From Ihee 


Da te 





Gen. Of you Di voi 

Dat. To you A voi vi. 

Ace. You Voi Vi. 

Abl. From you Da voi 



To him A lui GU. 

mm Lui Lo,. or II. 



\l)]. From him Da lui 







- 39 - 






Plural. 


Nom. 


They 


Eglino 


- Gen. 


Of them 


Di loro 


Dat. 


To them 


A loro 


Ace. 


Them 


Loro 


Abl. 


From them 


Da loro 




THIRD FERSO 


- 


Singu ar-Feminine. 


Nom. 


She 


Ella 


Gen. 


Of her 


Di lei 


^Dat. 


To her 
Her 


A lei 
Lei 


Abl. 


From her 


Da lei 


" 




Plural. 


Nom. 


They 


Elleno 


Gen. 


Of them 


Di loro 


Dat. 


To them 


A loro 


^y ACC. 


Them 


Loro 


Abl. 


From them 


Da loro 




Singular and P ural. 



MAS. AND FBM 



Conjunctive. 



Li, Gli. 



Le. 

La. 



Le. 



Gen. Of \ ^'''' ' ''^^' ^'""''^f^ f Di ,A 

/ herself, themselves, j ^ ^^ 

Dat. To \ ^^'' ' ''^f^ '*^"^^^^/'' \ A .o Si 

I herself, themselves. \ ^ ^^ ^'• 

Ace. . I ^"^' ' ^^^Z"' ^'"^''^f^ \ CA cj 

/ herself, themselves. \ ^^' 

Abl. From \ ^^^'^^^^A himself, \ 

{ herself, themselves. \ ^ 



40 — 



FIRST PERSON. 



■ 


^H 


Singular-Masculine. 


n 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 


Myself 
Of myself 
To myself 
Myself 
From myself 


lo stesso 
Di me stesso 
A me stesso 
Me stesso 
Da me stesso 


Conjum 

Mi. 
Mi. 



Plural. 



Nom. 


Ourselves 


Noi stessi 




Gen. 


Of ourselves 


Di noi stessi 


^-^ a IWT 


Dat. 


To ourselves 


A noi stessi 


Ci , or Ne 


Ace. 


Ourselves 


Noi stessi 


Ci, or Ne 


Abl. 


From ourselves 


Da noi stessi 






SEOOND 


PERSON. 






Singular-Masculine. 




Nom. 


Thyself 


Tu stesso 




Gen. 


Of thyself 


Di te stesso 




Dat. 


To thyself 


A te stesso 


Ti. 


Ace. 


Thyself 


Te stesso 


Ti. 


Abl. 


From thyself 


Da te stesso 





Plural. 



Nora. 


Yourselves 


Gen. 


Of yourselves 


Dat. 


To yourselves 


Ace. 


Yourselves 


Abl. 


From yourselves 



Yoi stessi 
Di voi stessi 
A voi stessi 
Voi stessi 
Da voi stessi 



Vi. 

Yi. 



— 41 — 



THIRD PEBSON. 







SiDgular-Masculine. 












Conjunctive. 


Nom. 


Himself 




Egli stesso 




Gen. 


Of himself 




Di se stesso 




Dat. 


To himself 




A se stesso 


Si. 


Ace. 


Himself 




Se stesso 


Si. 


Abl. 


From himself 




Da se stesso 





Plural. 



Nom. 


Themselves 


Eglino stessi 




Gen. 


Of themselves 


Di se stessi 




Dat. 


To themselves 


A se stessi 


Si. 


Ace. 


Themselves 


Se stessi 


Si. 


Abl. 


From themselves 


Da se stessi 






TBIRD 


FERSOS. 






Singular-Feminine. 




Nom. 


Herself 


Ella stessa 




Gen. 


Of herself 


Di se stessa 




Dat. 


To herself 


A se stessa 


Si. 


Ace. 


Herself 


Se stessa 


Si. 


Abl. 


From herself 


Da se stessa 





Plural. 



Nom. 


Themselves 


Elleno stesse 




Gen. 


Of themselves 


Di se stesse 




Dat. 


To themselves 


A se stesse 


Si. 


Ace. 


Themselves 


Se stesse 


Si. 


Abl. 


From themselves 


Da se steSse 





- 42 — 

Personal Pronouns in the nominative case are gener- 
ally omitted, except when an emphasis is required (1). 

The English use the verb To he impersonally with the 
pronouns in the Nominative case, but we make the verb 
agree w^ith the pronoun to which it relates: as, It is I, 
Sono io — It is you who say so, Siele voi che lo dite, 

Egli and Ella are used ornamentally in the sense of 
it: as, Egli e vero che ho amato ed amo Giannetta^ ed 
ella e impossibil cosa cKio possa abbaiidonarla , It is 
true that I have loved and love Jane, and it is impossible 
that I should abandon her. 

Conjunctive Pronouns either precede or follow the 
verb by which they are governed. In common conver- 
sation they are usually put before a verb: as. La cono- 
sco, I know her — Ci ama, He loves us. When placed 
after the verb, they are always joined to it: as, Sem- 
brami, It appears to me. 

When the verb terminates in a yowei which is 
accented, as also in all verbs of one syllable, the initial 
letter of the conjunctive pronoun is doubled: as, Dirolle 
che siete venuto, I will tell her you are come — Essa 
fammi spesso questo favore, She does me this favour often. 

Gli is excepted: as, Dirogli, and not Diroggli^ I will 
tell him. 

The conjunctive pronoun is almost invariably placed 



(1) Ltiij leij hrOj can never Le used as Nominatives instead of Eglij 
elliij eglinOj ellcno: the pupil is therefore particularly requested to guard 
against a custom so frequent amongst the Tuscans and slill more generally 
tolerated by the Florentines — Many other errors of the same kind are 
constantly occurring, for instance they say gli for le and loro — ci dissij 
ce lo dissi , when gli dissij le dissij, dissi loro : glielo dissij lo dissi loro etc. 
should be used, according lo the gender and number of persons, to which 
they apply : the above being evidenlly grammatical faults in our Language. 



- 43 - 

1". After a verb in the InGnitive Mood, which then 
loses its final e: as, Credo di vederla stasera, I think I 
shall see her this evening. 

When two Infinitives meet together, the conjunctive 
pronoun is placed after the first: as. Ho piacere di po- 
terle fare questo favore, I am glad to be able to do her 
this favour. 

2'^. After a Gerund: as, ScrivendolQ, la salutero in 
name vostro , In writing to her, I will salute her in your 
name. 

If however the Infinitive or Gerund be preceded by 
a negative particle, the conjunctive personal pronoun 
may be then elegantly placed before it. 

e:xa;>ipi.es. 

Le dirb di non vi aver vedulo. I will tell her I have not seen 

you. 
Non lo temendo, ho irionfaio By not fearing /urn, I have 
del mio nemico. conquered my enemy. 

3*^. After a participle past preceded by the participle 
present of an auxiliary verb, which latter participle is 
then not expressed in Italian. 

Inconiralolo oggi, gli ho parlalo Having met him to-day, I have 
di voi. spoken to him of you. 

Moslrata\e la lellera, non oso Theletter being shown fo/ier, 
pill parlare. she dared not speak any 

more. 

V^. After a verb in the Imperative Mood when 
affirmatively employed (except in the third person of 
both numbers), when negatively, it precedes. 



44 - 



£XAiaPL.ES. 



Raccontaleci qualche cosa di Relate to us something new, 

nuovo, e non ci parlale di and do not speak to us 

quel pazzerello. about that mad cap. 

Mi dia il mio. Let him give me my property. 

Ci consoUno dopo tanla affli- Let them console us after so 

zione. much affliction. 

5*^. After the word Ecco: as, Eccomi, Here / am— 
Eccoci, Here we are — Eccolo, Here he is — Eccone, Here 
are some etc. 

With me is expressed by meco — with thee, by teco — 
with himself, with herself, with themselves by seco. 

With him, with her, with them, are also expressed 
by seco, when they have reference to the nominative of 
the verb : as, He will conduct me with him, Egli mi 
condurrd seco. 

NB. When a verb governs a personal pronoun or 
pronouns joined by a conjunction to any other kind of 
pronoun or noun, the former remains personal and 
does not become conjunctive. 



10 sgridai lei e non lui. I scolded her and not him. 
Maria non lo disss ne a lui ne Mary neither told it to him 

a Paolo. nor to Paul. 

11 Signor Penrice o ne parlo Mr. Penrice spoke of it either 
a te, a mio padre. to Ihee, or to my father. 

lo so che il Signor Acland non I know Mr. Acland neither 
mallrattd ne lei ne il Si- illtrealed her nor Mr. Na- 

gnor Napier. pier. 



- 45 - 

11 Signor Stralton ama molto Mr. Slratton loves them and 
loro e la famiglia Rogers. the Rogers' family very 

much. 

Ella non vide lui, ma il cu- She did not see him, but his 
gino. cousin. 

The following serve as relative pronouns in the ac- 
cusative case only, and are referred to things as well as 
persons. 

Singular. Floral. 



Mas, Lo or II Him or It. 
Fem. La Her or It. 



Mas. Li or Gh } _,, 
r, T Ihem. 

tern. Le ) 



EXAMPIiES. 



^- / 



^i;de le«o qwei libro? No, ma Have you read that book? No, 

lo leggero presto. but I will read it soon. 

Avete veduto il Signor Hop- Have you seen Mr. Hoppner? 

pner? SijVho vedulo poco fa. Yes, I have seen him a 

little while ago. 
Non avete scrilto ancora quella Have you not yet written that 

leltera? No, malsL scrivero. letter? No, but I will 

write il. 
Dove sono i miei guanti? lo Where are my gloves? I have 

non gli ho veduti, not seen them. 

Vengono le voslre sorelle sla- Do your sisters come tonight? 

sera? lo le aspetto. I expect them. 

So is rendered by lo or la. If it relates to a noun 
substantive, it agrees with it in gender, if to an adjective, 
it is expressed invariably by lo. 



I 



EXAMPIiES. 



Siete voi il Signor S.? Silo sono. Are you Mr. S.? Yes I am. 



— 46 - 

Siele voi l<i Signora B.? Si la Are you Mrs. B. ? Yes I am. 

sono. 

Siele ammalato or ammalata? Are you ill? No I am not, or 

Non lo sono. I am not so. 

II is used in a lofty style as a conjunctive pronoun 
instead of lo: as, II vidi, I saw him; but never before an 
5 impura or a z: as, Lo stimo, and not il stimo,l esteem 
him. 

Gli accusative plural is used before a verb beginning 
with a vowel, s impura and z: as, Gli amo, I love 
them— Gli stima, She esteems them — Gli zomberd, He 
will beat them. 

Loro in the Dative case is more properly used 
without the preposition: as, Dite loro. Tell them (1). 



QliQGiQlQQ oJ'^ 



If Miss Reynolds sees them this evening, ( she will neither 
— vedrd siasera non parlerd 

speak) to him nor to her, but to Mrs. Ward — Say to them 
ne ne — Dile 

2 5 I 4 

continually that without honesty one can never succeed in 

che si pud non mai 

the world — You can write to her and tell her boldly 

polele francamenle 

what you think — Having called him , he answered me 
cid che pensale , chiamalo rispose 



(1) Sometimes iuij lei in the Dative case are also used without a 
preposition: as, Dile lui, Tell him — Dile lei, Tell her. 

(2) The pupil is requested to pay particular attention to the two fol- 
lowing Exercises. 



— 47 — 

3 2 I 4 

« here I am » but I saw him no more — The world prizes 

vidi stima 

many things which in themselves are worthless — To please 
che dispregevole Per 

14 3 2 

her yon must never flatter her — She spoke to them of 

{Dat.) hisogna che lusinghiale 

2 I 2 4 5 

you — Mr. Robertson will not say such a thing either to 
— dird ne 

2 I 

her or to them — They will not come with me, but my 

ne vogliono la mia 

company honours them — It is true that they have clone 

onora che [alio 

wrong, but I still esteem them — Having told her what you 

tuilavia delto [Dal.] 

2 I 2 

told me , after some days I saw her, and she did not salute 
dicesle salulb 

2 1 3 

me : ask her why? No, 1 will not speak to her (anymore) — 

chiedele [Dal.) voglio piii 

She said, it was I, it was not they, who spoke in your 
disse parlai voslro 

favour — Let him return her the book which she lent 

rendu (Dal.) cui presto 

him two months ago — The Misses Heming begged me to ask 
[Dat.) — pregarono 

you if you would go with them to night to Mrs. Macalister' s. 

volevale (Abl.) — 

Tell them (I am very sorry) not to be able to favour them. 
che mi displace assai di = 



— 48 — 



LESSON VIII. 



FBRSONAL AND GONJUHGTXVE FROKOUNS CONTINUED. 



Singular. 



Mas. Esso 
Fern. Essa 

I Medesimo or 
Stesso 



Mas. 1 



I Medesima or 



' i Stessa 
Mas. Desso 
Few. Dessa 



He. 

She. 

Self. 



Own-self, 

or 

Very same 

person. 



Plural. 

Mas. Essi 
Fern. Esse 

Medesimi or 



Mas. 



Fern. 



I Stessi 
Medesime or 



^ Stesse 
Mas. Dessi 
Fern. Desse 



They. 



> Selves. 



'Own- 
^ selves, or 
Very same 
persons. 



The two first pronouns do not change in the oblique 
cases. 

Esso is applied both to persons and things. With 
persons it is employed as egli, but more demonstratively: 
as, Come esso aveva disposto, As he had disposed — E 
son queste esse le sue parole, And these are his own words. 

It is frequently united (and always without changing 
number or gender) with lui, lei and loro governed by 
the preposition con: as, Con esso lui, With him — Con 
esso lei, With her — Con esso loro, With them. 

It is often united to the prepositions lungo, along, 
and sovra, upon, forming a single word : as, Lunghesso 
il fiurne, Along the river — Sot;resso il ponte, Upon the 
bridge. 

In its oblique cases it performs the office of a relative 
pronoun: as, Ho veduto la Trihuna e in mezzo di essa 



— 49 — 

la Venere de' Medici, I have seen the Tribune and in the 
midst of it the Venus of Medici. 

Medesimo or Stesso is used with pronouns to express 
emphasis: as, Lo faro io medesimo or io stesso, I will 
do it myself. 

Desso has more force than the preceding, and implies 
identity and asseveration. It is employed in the Nomina- 
tive only of both numbers, and for the most part with 
the verbs Essere, To be, and Parere , To seem: as, 
Questi e desso e non favella , It is himself and he does 
not speak — Dipinto si somigliante alia natura che par 
dessa, Painted so like nature that it seems nature herself. 

Ne is employed as the conjunctive personal pronoun 
ci in the dative and accusative case: as, Sole in tanta 
ajflizione ne hanno lasciate, They have left us alone in 
so great affliction — Questo ne sarebbe gran biasimo, 
That would be a great reproach to us. But ne in that 
signification is used more in poetry than in prose. 

It is used as a relative pronoun referring to some 
antecedent, or subject of discourse, and signifies 



Of, to, for, from, by, with or about j jt'^^hem^ 



EXAMPIiES. 

Non e V alhondanza delle ric- It is not the abundance of 
chezze che pud renderci fe- riches that can make us 
licif ma V uso che ne fac- happy, but the use we 
ciamo. make of them. 

Parla egli di quella Slgnora? Does he speak of that Lady? 
Si ne parla conlinuamente, Yes he speaks of her con- 

ma se ne fida pochissimo. tinually, but he trusts her 

very Hltle. 

Non oso parlarvene. I dare not speak to you about 

it. 



- 50 — 

In translating ne into English, it is necessary to add 
one, any, some, or substitute of it, of them: as, Avete 
libri? Ne ho, Have you any books, I have some — Non 
ne ho, I have none—Queste sono belle arancie, volete 
darmenel These are beautiful oranges, will you give me 
some. 

j It is employed with intransitive verbs of motion, 
having reference to some place mentioned or understood: 

\ as, Andarsene, To go — Venirsene, To come: as, Essi 
se ne venivano passo passo, They came step by step — 
Essa ci arrivo quando io ne partiva. She arrived here 
when I departed fi^om hence, 

Ci and Vi are employed as conjunctive personal 
pronouns in the dative and accusative case. 

EXAMPLES. 

Egli ci assislerd. He v^ill assist us. 

Essa ci diede una ricompensa. She gave us a rev^^ard. 
Essi vi hanno offeso. They have offended you. 

Io vi parlo da galantuomo. I speak to you as an honest 

man. 

They are employed also as relative pronouns refer- 
ring to things, and signify 

them. 

Provai quella perdiia quando I experienced that loss, when 

meno ci or \i pensava. I least thought of it. 

Egli imparerd Vltaliano, per- He will learn Italian, because 

che ci or vi si applica. he applies himself io it. 

Non iemele, ci or vi porro io Do not fear, I will provide a 

rimedio. remedy for it. 

Esso Io ha fallo, ma non ci or He has done it, but he will 

vi guadagnerd nulla. get nothing by it. 



— 31 — 

The impersonal phrases There is — There are — 
There was etc. are expressed in Italian by ci or vi: as, 
Ci sono or vi sono alcune persone che. . . There are some 
persons who. ... — Vi sono alcuni libri? Are there any 
books? 

They are used also as adverbs of locality, Ci having 
the sense of Here , Vi of There, 

Andale a Roma? Si , vi vado. Are you going to Rome? Yes, 

Quando ci rilornerele? Vi I am going there. When 

farosaper per letleraquando shall you return here? I 

mi ci dovrete aspellare. will let you know when you 

may expect me here again. 

Mi displace tanto di par tire I am so sorry to leave Lon- 

di Londra quando oppunlo don just as you arrive 

voi ci venite. [here). 

Egli e un luogo delizioso, ho It is a fine place, I intend to 

intenzione di stahilirmiYi. settle there. 

Sometimes ci and vi, as conjunctive personal pro- 
nouns, meet with ci and vi as adverbs of locality. When 
such is the case, the two latter are substituted for each 
other, to prevent an awkward repetition of them in 
different senses: as, I will conduct you there, lo vi ci 
condurro — You will see us here in a short time, Vi ci ^ 
vedrete fra poco. In these cases we may use also the ; 
adverbs of locality: as, lo vi condurro cola — Ci vedrete 
qui fra poco. * 

When mi, ti, ci, vi, si, as datives, or belonging to a 
reflective verb, meet with the accusatives lo, la, li, gli, 
le, or with the relative pronoun ne, they simply change ( 
their i into e if placed before the verb, but when coming 1 
after it, the two are united and joined to the verb. 



f 



— 52 - 



EXAMPI^ES. 



Avele ricevuio quel lihri da Have you received those books 

Carlo? Si. Quando ve li from Charles? Yes. When 

mando? leri, e doveva aver- did he send Ihem lo you? 

celi mandali alcuni giorni Yesterday, and he should 

fa, have sent Ihem lo us some 

days ago. 

Essi se ne vanlano, quando do- They boast of it, when they 

vrehbero invece vergognar- should rather be ashamed 

sene. " of it. 

^] Observe that ci and vi as adverbs of locality are 

subject to similar variation when they meet with any 

I of those accusatives; as well as ci or vi in impersonal 

f phrases, when they meet with the pronoun ne. 

{ 

Vedele quelV uccellino in quel- Do you see that little bird in 
Valbero? Non ve lo vedo. that tree? I do not see it 

there. 
Ve ne sono due. There are two of them. 

NB. The pronoun gli, as dative, does not change its 

i into e when meeting with any of the above accusatives, 

1 but has an e added to it, and is invariably united in one 

word, whether placed before or after the verb, being 

in this case used for the masculine and feminine gender. 

EXAMPLiES. 

II Signor Parker glieli man- Mr. Parker will send them to 
derd dimani. him (or lo her) to-morrow. 

Procurero di parlargViene sla- I will endeavour lo speak to 
sera. him (or to her) of it this 

evening. 



53 



Sometimes these pronouns when meeting together 
are elegantly contracted into one word, losing their flnal 
Yowel, except before any other vowel, s impura or z. 



Ella mel raccomandb calda- She recommended /urn (or ?7) 
mente. to me earnestly. 

Essi non se lo immagineranno They will never imagine il. 
mat. 

The following table contains every possible mode in 
which these conjunctive pronouns can occur. 



Comijiouud, Couiuud\'\3C- Pyououus. 



Mas. 
Fern. 
Mas. 
Fern. 
Mas. 
Fern. 
Mas. 
Fern. 
Mas. 



Me lo 

Me la 
Me li 
Me le 
Te lo 
Te la 
Te li 
Te le 
Glielo 



Fern. Gliela 

Mas. Glieli 

Fem. Gliele 

Me ne 

Te ne 

Gliene 



him or it to me. 
her or it to me. 
them to me. 
them to me. 
him or it to thee, 
her or it to thee, 
them to thee, 
them to thee, 
him or it to him, 

to her. 
her or it to him, 

to her. 
them to him or to 

her. 
them to him or to 

her. 
some of it etc. to 

me. 
some of it etc. to 

thee, 
some etc. to him, 

to her. 



Mas. 


Ce lo 


him or it to ns. 


Fem. 


Ce la 


her or it to us. 


Mas. 


Ce li 


them to us. 


Fem. 


Ce le 


them to us. 


Mas. 


Ve lo 


him or it to you. 


Fem. 


Ve la 


her or it to you. 


Mas. 


Ve li 


them to you. 


Fem. 


Ve le 


them to you. 


Mas. 


Se lo 


him or it to one's 


Fem. 


Se la 


self, themselves, 
her or it to one's 


Mas. 


Se li 


self, themselves, 
them to them- 
selves. 


Fem. 


Se le 


them to them- 
selves. 




Ce ne 


some of it etc. to 
us. 




Ve ne 


some of it etc. to 


[ 


Se ne 


you. 
some etc. to him- 
self, themselves. 
5* 



i 



— 04 — 



NB. Wbea these five pro- 
nouns lo , la, li , le and ne 
H/f^^ T ^ i„« J • -^ . .1 I are used in coniunction with 

Mas. Lo....loro him or it lo them. I , , , , 

I loro , they must he placed be- 
Fem. La.. ..loro her or it lo them. I fore the verh, and loro after, 
Tif X • 1 .. , ,1 1 except with ihe /n/7«z7/p'e, Ge- 

Mas. Li ....loro them lo ihem. ] ^ , ' 

J rund. Participle past, and Im- 

Fem. Le....lorO ihem lo Ihem. \ peraticeaf/irmativel'y employ- 

■vr„ I c -x I I c^, in which case they must be 

JNe....loro some, some of it etc. I ' „ . ... 

I placed after in two distinct syl- 

lO Ihem. f lablesj as,i\Wlo^aroloro, ! 

I shall not give it to them —Da- 

\ tela loro, Give il to them etc. 

You have no doubt ( some fouiidaticii ) in reproaching 

siete senza duhhio fondatn a (Inf.) 

him for his faults, but is there (any one) on earth who is 

{Dat.)-=la sua mancanza alcuno che sia 

exempt from them? — When Louis sends me Alfieri 1 

manderd — 

(tviH return) it to them — I (shall speak) to them about it, 

restituiro parlero 

and give you a faithful account of it— If you meet with them, 

daro = esallo vi avvenile in 

tell it only to her, and not to Paul — When they return us 

reslituiranno 
those books which we lent them, (we will send) them to 
que' cui preslammo manderemo alle 

your sisters, if they (had sent) us them before, we (should 
voslre avessero mandali atremmo 

have lent) them to them some days ago — The uncle intrusted 
preslaii commise 

some bottles of Champagne to us, but (we have not been able) 

— non abbiamo polulo 

to send them to him — Do him that favour, I (was thinking) 
= Fate quel pensava 

of it now — Come and see us often. Yes, v.^e (will come) here 
Venile a [Inf.] vcrremo 



— S5 — 

very often — Is it uncle John who comes? Yes it is himself. 

viene 
He looks uneasy. He is always so — Are there any gloves? 
semhra inquielo guanlo 

There are not any. There was a pair upon the little table 

paio 
this morning. I have not seen them — I want some paper, 

veduli Bo bisogno di 

ask Paul for some — As you have so many lemons send them 

{Dal.) Siccome limone mandate 

some. I cannot send them any, because I have promised 
now posso promesso 

some of them to Mr. Valpy — If Mr. Acland comes soon , 

— — verrd 

2 1 2 

we (will go) there directly, perhaps he will not take you 

andremo subito condurrd 

there, (on the contrary) (I believe he will.) — Let Mr. Travers 

anzi lo credo — 

speak to them about it, and let him give us an answer in time. 
parli dia {Dal.) 



LESSON IX. 

POSSESSIVE FRONOITNS. 

Are those which relate to possession or properly. 

II mio La mia I miei Le mie My, or mine. 

II tuo La tua I tuoi Le tue Thy, or thine. 

II suo La sua I suoi Le sue HU, her, her s, lis. 

II nostro La nostra I nostri Le nostre Our, or our's. 

II vostro La voslra I vostri Le vostre Your, or your's. 

II loro La loro I loro Le loro Their, or theirs. 



- S6 — 

These pronouns are generally declined with the defi- 
nite article, and agree with the thing possessed and not, 
as in English, with the possessor, for which reason they 
must be repeated either before or after the substantive. 

Pietro mi mando ieri la sua Peter sent me his carriage 

carrozza. yesterday. 

Maria ha venduto 11 suo anello. Mary has sold her ring. 

Ei lesse la letiera mia e la He read my letter and your's. 

vostra. 

My, thy, his, her, our, your, their coming with a 
noun that signifies any corporeal part, any faculty or 
affection of the mind ( such as anima , soul — cuore, 
heart — memoria , memory — speranza, hope — paura, 
fear ) and a verb of action or motion, are expressed by 
corresponding conjunctive personal pronouns in the 
dative case: viz. mi, ti, gli, le, ci, vi, loro, and the 
definite article is placed before the substantive. 

I broke his arm. Gli ruppi il braccio. 

We cut our fingers. Ci tagliammo le dita. 

You hurt your foot. Vi facesle male al piede. 

Consonant to this rule his, her, their are expressed 
by si, if they have reference to the same person or per- 
sons as the nominative, and by gli, le, loro, if they have 
reference to some other person or persons. 

Peter broke his (own) arm. Pietro si ruppe il braccio. 
Peter broke his (John's) arm. Pietro gli ruppe il braccio. 



— 57 — 

She cut her (own) finger. Ella si taglio il diio. 

She cut her (Mary's) finger. Ella le taglio il dilo. 

They hurt fJ'ieir (own) legs. Essi si /ecero ma?e aWegambe. 

They hurt f/ieir (of others) Essi fecero loro maie alle 
legs. gambe. 

But when the verb expresses an action which has 
more reference to the subject referred to, than to the 
person who is the nominative of the verb, then we 
omit the possessive pronoun: as, Volgete gli occhi a quel 
quadro, Turn your eyes to that picture — Riposate il 
capo su questo guancialCy 'Rest your head on this pillow. 

When the possessive pronouns are immediately fol- 
lowed by a noun of title or kindred in the singular 
number, they do not take the article, loro alone excepted: 
as, Sua Maestd, His Majesty — Mio padre, My father — 
La loro madre, Their mother. But they require the article 
when the noun is in the plural, when it is a diminutive, 
when the possessive pronoun is put after, and when an 
adjective, or the words Signore, Signora, Signorina 
intervene. 

Ella lo disse a' miei fralelli. She said it to my brothers. 
La sua figliuolina non isld bene^ His dear Utile daughter is not 

well. 
Ne parlero al padre mio. I will speak lo my father about 

it. 
/ miei complimenti alia vostra My compliments to your dear 

cara madre. mother. 

Cosi mi ordino la Maestd sua. Thus his Majesty ordered me. 
Ce lo disse i\ vostro Sig,noreZio: Your uncle told it lo us. 

When any noun, accompanied by the possessive 
pronoun, relates to the subject of the proposition, the 
possessive pronoun is omitted: as, Egli ha perduto il 
padre e la madre, He has lost his father and mother. 



f 

I 



— 58 - 

They dispense with the article when they are pre- 
ceded by some indeterminate or demonstrative pronouns, 
and when they follow the Verb To be in the sense of 
belonging to: as, Qualche vostro nemico, Some enemy 
of your's — Ogni mia speranza, Every hope of mine — 
Di chi e queslo libro? E mio, Whose is this book? It 
is mine. 

11 mio, il tuoj il suo, il nostro, il vostro, il loro are 
employed substantively in the singular to signify personal 
substance or property: as, Ella non ha cura del suo, She 
does not take care of her own (property). In the plural 
they signify parents, relations, friends , followers etc. as, 
// Generate comando a' suoi di attaccare il nemico, The 
general ordered his troops to attack the enemy. 

One's own, employed in an indeterminate sense, is 
rendered in Italian by proprio preceded by the article: 
as, To confess one's own sins is a mark. . . II confessare 
i proprj peccati e un segno. . . 

When own is added to the possessive pronoun, it 
may be omitted, or expressed with or without the 
possessive pronoun: as, She wrote that letter with her 
own hand, Ella scrisse quella letter a di suo pugno, or 
di suo proprio pugno, or di proprio pugno. 

Since suo has reference only to a singular noun in 
the third person; to prevent confusion in such sentences 
as the following, it is necessary to render his by di lui — 
her by di lei — their by di loro: as, Maria ama suofratello 
ed i figli di lui, Mary loves her brother and his sons — 
Essi ingannarono Paolo ed Antonio ed i figli di loro. 
They deceived Paul and Anthony and t?ieir sons — Ma- 
ria ama suo fratello ed i suoi figli, in this case, they 
are the sons of Mary and not of her brother. It would 
however be useless to make use of such a mode of 
expression, when the nominative is in the first or second 



- 39 — 

person: as, Noi lodammo molto Giovanni e suo jiglioy 
We praised John and his son very much. It is easy to 
see in this example whose is the son, as in the following 
whose is the daughter, Voi amate voslra sorella e sua 
flglia, You love your sister and her daughter. 

A friend of mine, of thine etc. is expressed by Vnf 
mio amico, un tuo amico etc. as, A friend of your's has 1 
deceived me, un vostro amico m' ha ingannato. * 

In English the possessive pronoun is sometimes found t 
before a Gerund, performing the office of the verb, of \ 
which the possessive pronoun is the subject. When such ^ 
is the case, the Gerund is to be put in the Infinitive 
Mood with the masculine definite article prefixed, and ] 
the possessive pronoun is rendered by its corresponding 
nominative personal pronoun. 



My being or having. 
Of thy being or having. 
To his being or having. 
From her being or having. 
Without our being or having. 

After your being or having. 

Through Iheir being or hav- 
ing. 

My having been or having 
had etc. 

Her writing such a letter will 
oblige him very much. 

Their having called upon 
her, prevented her coming 
to them. 



V esser io or Vaver io. 
DeW esser lu or deW aver tu. 
AW esser egli or all' aver egli. 
DalV esser elldi or dall'aver ella. 
Senza esser noi or senza aver 

noi. 
Dopo esser voi or dopo av^r voi. 
Per esser eglino or per aver 

eglino. 
L'essere io slato or Vaver io 

avulo, etc. 
Lq scriver ella una tal lellera 

V ohhligherd assai. 
V esser essi passati da lei, im- 

pedi it vcnir essa da lore. 



— 60 — 



QsiQaoaaa s. 



Caesar gave the throne of Egypt to Cleopatra , and 
Cesare diede Egilto — 

remoyed her brother from it — His having been so prudent 

allontano si 

2 

and courageous was the cause of the victory — Does your 

fu 

3 1 

wife know my misfortune?— I can do what I like with my 

sa posso cib che voglio {Gen.) 

own money — My father, mother and brothers are in the 

[DaL] 
country with your friends and their children — My cousin 
campagna bambino 

is gone to visit and console his sister, who has lost her 

andalo a perdulo 

dear little child — Have you any news of your parents? No, 

but I expect some from my (mother-in-law) by the post 

aspetlo suocera per posla 

— She esteems her (son-in-law) as much as he hates his 

slima genero odia 

(daughter-in-law) — Their (nephew's son) and our (grand 

nuora pronipoie nipo- 

sons) are all ill : this news pierces my heart — A friend of 

lino stanno spezza 

their's (lost at cards) last night all his property — Her dear 

si giuocb 
little niece (will come) here with my (sister-in-law) — Pe- 

nipote verrd cognala 

ter (being afraid) for his own life (laid the fault) on his 

temendo {Gen.) incolpo {Ace.) 

(great grand father) — Whose is this little dog? It is our's 

bisavo 
—Do me the favour to present this petition to his Majesty. 

di 



~ 61 — 

We Italians and especially the Tuscans, in speaking 
or writing to a Superior, a Lady, or Gentleman, make 
use of the feminine gender and of the third person; viz. 
La Signoria Vostra,ov Vosignoria, Your Lordship or 
Ladyship, for which Ella is substituted in the following 
manner (1). 







Pers. Pron. 


Conjunctive. 


Norn. 


Tou (Madame, or Sir 


) Ella 




Gen. 


Of you 


Dilei 




Dat. 


To you 


A lei 


Le. 


Ace. 


You 


Lei 


La. 


Abl. 


From you 


Da lei 




Nom. 


You (Gentlemen) 


Lor Signori 




Gen. 


Of you 


Di lor Signori 




Dat. 


To you 


A lor Signori 




Ace. 


You 


Lor Signori 


Li, or Gli. 


Abl. 


From you 


Da lor Signori 




Nom. 


You (Ladies) 


Lor Signore 




Gen. 


Of you 


Di lor Signore 




Dat. 


To you 


A lor Signore 




Ace. 


You 


Lor Signore 


Le. 


Abl. 


From you 


Da lor Signore 





(1) Dante, Petrarch, Boccaccio, Goldoni, and many other good Authors 
never use Ella to evince respect, but always Voi. 

Dante in speaking with veneration to one of his ancestors, says 

« Dal voi che prima Roma sofferire 



Ricominciaron le parole mie. 

lo cominciai: voi siete il padre mio, 
Voi mi date a parlar tutta baldezza 
Voi mi levale si ch'io son piu ch'io. » 

Petrarch, who always addresses Laura respectfully, says 

Faggio proferto il cor, ma a Voi non piace. 

Many other examples in corroboration might be adduced from the best 
authorities. Nevertheless we give the following Exercise on this rule. 

6 



-- 62 — 

According to this mode of addressing persons, le 
signorie loro, may be used both for Gentlemen, and 
Ladies. 

The verb is to be put in the third person; as, Come 
sta SignorCy or Signora, or for both Ella? How do 
you do Sir or Madam? Come stanno le Signorie loro? 
How do you do, Gentlemen or Ladies? 

The adjective and participle agree with the title: as, 
E ella sodisfatta? Are you (Sir or Madam) satisfied? 

Tour, having reference to one person, is expressed 
by il suo, la sua etc. relating to two or more persons, 
by il loro, la loro: as, Signora ho letto i suoi comandi, 
Madam I have read your orders — Signori la loro stima 
mi e di un gran pregio, Gentlemen your esteem is of 
great value to me. 

Q^2aQ33Q 9. 

I heard that you fell from your horse and hurt your 
intesi cadde ■= 

head ~ If you do not go to your cousin's, she (will come) 

= andrd {Ahl.) verrd 

to you — We saw you (this morning) with some friends 
(Abl.) Abhiamo veduta slamane 
of your's — Lord Listowel has heard things which 

— — udilo die 

( will fdl ) your heart with joy — Why this indulgence to 
innonderanno {Gen.) 

your nephew? You spend your property to gratify his 

spende per aggradire [Dal.) 

ridiculous pride — You lost your cause through your 

orgoglio ha per so lile 

refusing to show those papers — Miss Wells wished that 
ricusare di — voile 

your books (should be) returned to you — My brothers and 
fossero 



— 63 — 

your sisters went there together — Mrs. Bonsor told me 

andarono — disse 

that (at last) you have received letters from your relations, 

finalmente 
and I participate in your joy — Remember me to your 

vengo a parte {Gen.) Rivcrisca [Ace.) 

father and sisters. 



LESSON X. 

DEOIOfi STRATXVB PaONOUNS. 

Are those which precisely point out the subjects to 
which they relate, and shew the time and place. 

They are of three classes. 

The first class is composed of those which indicate 
the proximity of an object to the person who speaks: 
as, Questo libro, This book. 

The second class of those which indicate the proxim- 
ity of an object to the person spoken to: as, Codesto 
libro y That book. 

The third class comprehends those which indicate 
the object equally distant both from the person spoken 
to, and person speaking: as. Quel libro, That book. 

We present them arranged in their respective classes. 



— 64 






o 

OS 

V. 



ts 






5S 



O 



E«H 









50 

o 

OS 

O 



a. 



r » 

O rt .-T O- C 



-r, ':^ ^ 



6S a 



3 O O 



o 






o 






M 









W 



1 



53 






o 

OS 

o ^ 






e/9 



?^ 



PI 



CO 

OS 
C<9 



CO 






o rt 

CO CO 

o o 

o a 

-«— > --^ 

CO CO 

rs -a 

© o 



CO 

o 



II 

rv 
C« CO 

O « 

o o 



S2 

o 

«s 



c<s 

O 
e<S 
§>. 
«> 

OS 

Co 
O 



CO CO 

O « 
© © 



e 

CO 

© 
© 

CO 
o 

© 



eo 



OS 

to 

OS 



o 

CO 

03 

CO 



CO 

o 

«o 

OS 

S^ 

OS 

CO 

OS 









© 


S 3 


•^ 3 


• ■■4 a^ 


;-< 


CO CO 


CO CO 


s © 


3 


o a 


© © 


CO CO 


CO 


= =3 


3 3 


© © 


© 


oa 


OC^ 


uo 


u 


t^ck 


^- ^• 


• • 


^ 


ss ss 


s s 


S S 


-= f^ • 


•^ft '^ii* 


'^^ p*^ 


•?^ '-^ 


"£ 5* i--i 


CO CO 


&. ^ 


cc ^ 


":=? «^ ?s 


Co S 


c^ g 


Mas. 
Fern. 


2 "s S. 


*2 § 









-^ 




c 




s 




:S 




t^ 




4-> 




<*^ 




C3 




*« 




^ 




& 




^ 




o 








> 




5- 




a 




4^ 




o 




C 




t* 




a 




o 




C 




<^ 




o 




a> 




C/3 




J3 




a 




■> 




o 




ss 




u 




u 








^ 




h 




?> 




0) 

^5 




'K 
«» 




O 




a 




>-> 

c 




bi 




« 




o 




SI 




is 




IM 




? 




^ 




^ 




a> 








^ 




g- 




^ 


CS 


S 




CS 


s; 






3 


•<!«ia 


<<: 




Q- 


•Si 








^Md 


C 




u 


m 


re 




O 










that 
king 


hi 

c2 




'3 

3 


j-cri. 


, "^ 




ts 






^ 


^« 


13 




CO B 


a 




rt 


•c*> .S 


C3 






==^^ 


*v 




O 


wts: 


a> 

V3 




^ 




C3 




« 




Sm 




C 




.C 




3 




cu 




&• 




C3 


4^ 


.C 






s 


*"* 




Cm 


C3 


tti 


'bM 


O 


B 






O 


a 

a 


uu 








V 


o 








u 


"oj 


^ -^ 


33 


_aj 


? 




•*-> 


'^- ■ 


o 




C3 




> 


• 


■-a 

s 

W5 


n 




Oj 
•si 


'? 


=2 

<u 


1 


-s 




t>5 


s 




"5 


3 




2 


c 


V3 


CO 








CO 




'Eb 




CJ 


r\ 


u 


? 


-CJ 


^ 


^— 


tn 


o 

^ 




c 




« 


_C 


"3 


** 


ts 


ifl 


U3 


rt 


o 




CS 




$- 


u 

,£ 


s 


e 


1—1 


c 

o 

s 





Cm 






— 63 - 

None of these pronouns take the definite article, 
but are governed by the particles di, a, da: as, Per la 
dolce memoria di quel giorno, For the pleasing remem- 
brance of that day. 

Questi, Cotesti and Quegli refer to a person, and are 
used only in the nominative singular of the masculine 
gender: as, Questi e il mio maestro^ cotesti mio padre, 
e quegli mio cugino, This man is my master, that man 
is my father, and that person my cousin. 

Questo, Cotesto and Quello are applied to things as 
well as persons, and are used adjectively with substan- 
tives as well as by themselves. 

Questo veslilo mi e Iroppo This coat is too long for me. 

lungo. 

Cotesto vesUto vi sla bene. That coat fits you well. 

Quella casa e belUssima. That house is very fine. 

Slasera andremo a questo tea- This evening we will go to this 

Iro, domani sera a quello. theatre, to-morrow evening 

to that. 

Stamane, stamattina, This morning — - Stasera, This 
evening — Stanotte, To night, are contractions of questa 
rnane^ questa maltina; questa sera; questa nolle. 

This friend of mine — That book of yours etc. are 
expressed by Questo mio amico, Cotesto vostro libro etc. 

NB, He, She and They, followed by a relative pro- 
noun, are rendered either by chi alone, with the verb 
in the singular, or by colui che; colei che; coloro die. 

He who loves virtue etc. Colui che or chi ama la vir- 

iii etc. 
She who was the cause of it Colei che or chi ne fu la caii- 
will be punished. sa, sard punita or punito. 



— 66 — 

They wholi\e in affluence for- Colore che vivono velVabbon- 
gel the miseries of others. danza dimenlicano le miscric 

degli allri, or chi vive etc. 
dimentica etc. 

Costuif Costei, Costoro denote proximity to the person 
who speaks, as the pronoun questi, but they are used 
in all relations of the noun with the verb. 

EiXAMPL,ES. 

Quando vidi costui nel gran When I saw this man in the 

deserlo. great desert. 

Cost costei ch'e Ira le donne So this one who is a sun 

un sole. amongst women. 

Deh ferma il guardo a rimirar Now fix your eye and admire 

costoro I these persons. 

Colui, Colei, Coloro denote distance both from the 
person who speaks and the person spoken to, and are 
the same as quegliy but used in the same manner as 
the three . e. 

lo ho assai con una colpa of- I have sufficiently offended the 
feso gVlddii uccidendo colui. Gods by the single crime of 

killing that man. 
Queslae colei chetanlo e posla This is that (fortune) who is 
in croce pur da color che le so contemned even by those 
' dovrian dar lode. persons who ought to praise 

her. 

\ Costui, Costei, Costoro — Colui, Colei, Coloro are 

j elegantly used in the genitive case governed by a nomi 

I without di: as, La costui professione, The profession of 

I this man — Al colei grido, At the call of that female. 



— bi — 

• 

This, That, meaning this thing, that thing, are 
expressed by questo, cio; codesto, quello : as, What 
means this? Che vuol dir questo? — That which you 
say is not to be beheved, Cotesto che voi dite non e da 
credersi — Do not speak to him of that — Non gli par- 
late di cio. 

Questo, preceded by the preposition in or a, often 
indicates the present time with reference to some sub- 
stantive understood: as, In questo ella sopravvenne, At 
this (moment) she came up — A questo mi hanno con- 
dotto, To this (point) they have conducted me. 

The former in Itahan is rendered by quello, quella etc. 
and the latter, by questo, questa etc. as, Rehgion and 
superstition have very different effects on the human 
mind, the former strengthens it, but the latter renders 
it feeble. La religione e la superstizione producono diffe- 
renti effetti nella mente umana, quella la rinvigorisce, 
ma questa la rende debole. 

What, used independently without reference to a 
substantive, and meaning what thing, is expressed by 
che [cosa understood) : as, I do not know what to think, 
Non so che pensare. 

Q^QGiQQSa iO. 

The virtues which the Persians ( carefully inspired ) , 

Pcrsiano avevano cura d'inspirare 
were truth and goodness, sobriety and obedience, the two 

former make us resemble the Gods, the two latter 

fanno • (Dat.) = 

are necessary for the preservation of order — He who 

conservazione 



— 68 — 

can moderate his passions is very happy. — That Lady 
pud Signora 

whom you saw this morning is the wife of that man 

cui avele veduta 

who deceived you — This cloth is finer than it seems 
inganno panno pare 

— He who is too indulgent to himself, has generally less 

iroppo 
forbearance for others — Pvome and Florence are interest- 
compiacenza 
ing cities, the former for its historical recollections, the 

ricordanza 
latter for having been the seat of the fine arts — The 

essere slaia sede ' 

manners of that man do not please that woman whom 

== piacciono [Bat.] cui 

5 2 

he pretends to love so much. — Those persons deceive 
pretende di ingannano 

themselves who think that happiness consists in riches — 

pensano = [I'nf.) 

She came to me this morning, and perhaps (will return) 

e venuia (Abl.) rilornerd 

2 1 

this evening — Those stockings of your's are not of the 
quality you told me — His bad manners have brought 
che hanno condoUo 

him to this end. — That which you told him (was not to 

non era da 
be said) — The man whom you see speaking with that 
dirsi vedele {Inf.) 

4 

Lady is my uncle — 1 cannot imagine what this brother of 

non posso 

i 2 5 

your's means to say. 
inlenda di 



69 — 



Si 












^ 
•<?* 



1-' 






^ -^ 



X 

o 



r 



(0 

o 
o 

0! 
Pi 

H 
> 

M 

o 

09 
U 



Q 
< 

n 
> 

E< 

n 



> 

M 
< 

n 



O) 

s 

o 
&» 

Oi 

;-< 
o 

O 



o 



a 

OP 

be 



1 









i 



0- 



i 



S 



•N 

« 






'S 








• 


J 


C/2 


'ts 


(/i 


CO 






-q 






w 


SS 




s 


e 


=5 


C/J 




!:5 


O 


CD 
J3 


^ 


£i^ 


■4W 


, 


< 


-c 


5= 




CD 


.5 




1"=^ 
i-»i< 


t/} 




c; 






o 

















-a 
a 

o 



.-I « 



CD 



0) 



c 
o 



3 
« 



Q < 



S «3 



5 Cr^ g, 13 ©^ 






3 ©^ 3 

>=-( Q ^ H-( Q 



Zi 



13-2 "rt 

^ 3 «^ ^ 3 

2 '^'^ Sh 13 ©^ 

3 ©^ S 

^-^ Q < H-3 fi 



0) 



o 



o 



0) C3 ,»-( i3_, 

-^ S 2 rS 3 

§ S^ 3 g 5, 

^-S ^ ^13 

S fi <1 S fi 

© 0) CS o -C 

;?; ;5 Q ^ <S 






3 



CD 



© 



^ Q <J ^j Q «:© 



•© 



cs 



) 



— 70 — 

11 quale, la quale etc. and their variations, are applied 
both to persons and things : as, L uomo il quale vedeste, 
The man whom you saw - — / libri de' quah vi parlai. 
The books of which I spoke to you. 

Che^ unvaried, serves for all cases in both numbers 
and genders, and is applied to persons as well as things. 
In its oblique cases it takes the prepositions di^ a, da. 

Gil autori che leggele. The authors vJiich you read. 

Quesla e la casa che lanto mi This is the house which I like 

piace. so much. 

Gli occhi di che io parlai si The eyes o/'ii;/izc/i I spoke with 

caldamenle. so much ardour. 

Cui is as unvaried as che, and serves for all cases 
(except the nominative), whatever may be their number 
or gender, and has reference to persons as well as things: 
as, E caddi come Vuom cui sonno piglia, And I fell as a 
man whom sleep over-takes — / libri di cui mi par las te? 
The books of which you spoke to me? 

The word che is sometimes liable to error, as in the 
following example, E morto il servo che amava mio 
padre. We cannot clearly see, if the love is on the part 
of the servant with respect to the father, or on the part 
of the father with respect io the servant. It would be 
better then to say. E morto il servo cui amava mio padre, 
The servant, whom my father loved, is dead. 

It is employed in the genitive and dative case without 
a preposition. In the genitive, it is placed between the 
article and the noun on which it depends, and in the 
dative, it precedes the verb: as, // cui sapere. Whose 
knowledge — Voi, cui natura diede tanto coraggio. You 
io whom nature gave so much courage. 



— 71 — 

Onde is employed in poetry and also in elevated 
diction in the sense of del quale, -pel quale, col quale, dal 
quale etc. and in the plural of both genders: as, Penso 
alle sue disgrazie ond' egli con ragione piange , I think 
of his misfortunes for which he weeps with reason. 

What or Which, having reference to a substantive, 
always precedes it, (an exception to the general rule of 
relative pronouns) and is expressed by che or quale, but 
quale cannot be used in a phrase of admiration: as, I 
do not know what book I shall read, Non so che or qua! 
libro leggero — What a fine picture! Che bel quadro! 

What, meaning that which, is expressed by cib che 
or quel che; as, I know what you said to her. So cio 
che or quel che le diceste. 

When a sentence is the antecedent, which is express- 
ed by il che or la qual cosa: as, I have not yet met 
with the books I want, which hinders me from finishing 
that work, Non ho amor a trovato i libri di cui abbiso- 
gno, il che or la qual cosa m* impedisce di terminare 
queW opera. 

NB. A relative pronoun is always expressed in 
Itahan, and never omitted as in English: as, / libri 
cui compraste, The books you bought. 

INTEaBOGATZVES. 

Are used in asking questions. 
Chi? Who? 

Nam. \ ^^^'^"f' . ! Which? What? 
I Lhe? or che cosa? | 

Di chi? Of whom? Whcse? 

Gen. \ Di quale, diquali? j ^f Which? Of whai? 
f Di che? or di che cosa? ) 



— 72 — 
A chi? To ivhom? 

Dal. ! 4 1 'o ' u o To ivhich? To what? 

I A che? or a che cosa? ) 

Chi? Whom? 

Ace. \ ^f'^'^^f'^ \ Which? What? 

/ Che? or che cosa? ) 

Da chi? From whorrh? 

Abl. 1 TT^ ^ „ ' , , * ^ From which? From what? 
f Da che? or da che cosa? ] 

Sing. Quanlo? Quanta? Hotv much? 
PL Quanli? Quante? Hoiv many? 

Chi is applied (o persons only: as, Chi vi ha guidati 
chi vi fu lucerna? Who guided you or who was your 
light — Di chi parlate ? Of whom do you speak ? 

Che is employed both with or without a substantive : 
as, Che disse? or Che cosa disse? What did he say? And 
never Cosa disse. 

Quale and Quanto may be joined to a substantive 
or detached from it : as, Quale parere e il voslro? or 
Qual e il vostro parere? What is your opinion? 

Instead of quale and quanto, we may use che: as, 
Bio solo sa che dolor e io sento (that is qual dolore or 
quanto dolore] y God only knows how much grief I feel. 

There are some people whom we hale, and others 

'persona {pi.) odiamo allro 

whom we love without knowing why: the former 
amiamo (WO 

2 3 

is an injustice, the latter a weakness. — What did she 

2 1 

say to you? Of what Lady do you speak? Of Miss Wool- 



- 73 — 

2 i 

mer whose beautiful face you admire so much — They 

viso ammirale cotanto 

cauuot come either to-day or to-morrow, which (will 
non possono ne ne sard 

be) the cause of much expense — The man whose 

dispendio 
conduct is regular, and whose actions are honest, is hap- 
condolla 
pier than he who abandons himself to his inclinations — 

abhandona 
"What are your pastimes in that wretched house? 

passalempo misero 

^ 1 

We play at cards. How much did you lose last night? 
si gioca perdesle ieri 

Not much, but who is more unlucky than I? — There are 
occasions when silence is preferable to words — 
in cui discorso [sing.) 

What a destiny! Under what an unfortunate star I (was born!) 

nacqui 
—Fashion is a tyrant whose laws and caprices (it is necessary) 

convicne 
to follow — Here is the youth whom you heard sing 
= udisle 

last evening, and whose voice is so sweet — Send me 

mandate 

the letters you have written —Whom shall we believe? 

serine [Dal.) credercmo 

1 1 

— In what 'do they employ their time? — Of what does 

impicgano =r 

he accuse his friend? — The letter in which you have 
aecusa 

2 1 

found that note is not mine. 
Irovato . bigliello 



— 74 



LESSOIN XII. 



INDEFINITE PBONOUNS. 



Are those which express Iheir subjects in an indefi- 



nite or general manner. 



Altri (Nom. sing, only) 

Gen. d'altrui, Dat. ad altrui. 

Ace. altrui, Ahl. da altrui. 
Altro, altra; altri, altre. 
L'uno e I'altro, Tuna e T altra; 

gli uni e gli altri, le une e le 

altre; ambedue, ambo, tutli e 

due, tulle e due. 
L' un Tallro, I'una I'altra; gli uni 

gli altri, le une le altre. 
L' uno r altro, I'una o 1' altra; gli 

uni gli altri, le une o le altre. 
Ne r uno ne 1' altro , ne 1' una ne 

r altra; ne gli uni ne gli altri, 

ne le une ne le altre. 
Per uno. 

Alcuno, alcuna; alcuni, alcune. 
Qualcheduno, qualcheduna; qual- 

cuno, qualcuna. 
Nessuno, nessuna; veruno, veru- 

na; niuno, niuna; nullo, nulla; 

neppur uno, neppur una. 



Any one, some one, 
Another, Somebody else, 
Other people. 
Other, Others. 

Both. 



Each other, One ano-s 

Iher. 
Either the one or the 

other. One or other. 

Neither the one nor the 
other. 

Each. 
Some, any. 

Somebody, Some one, 
Any one. 

No body, No one. 
Not one, Not any. 



luxcvmW . 



Qualche 
Nulla, niente 



Some, Any, 
Nothing. 



f 



— 73 — 

Altri is the Nominative singular of a distinct pronoun 
making altrui in its oblique cases: as, Altri dice il con- 
trario e non s*inganna, Some one says the contrary, and 
does not deceive himself — Che mena dritto altrui per 
ogni calle, Which ( the sun understood ) leads others 
straight thro' every path. 

Altrui is employed in the genitive and dative cases 
(like cui) with or without a preposition. In the genitive 
it is to be put between the article and the substantive 
on which it depends: as, Penso cogli altrui danni raf- 
freddare il suo fervenle amore, He thought by injuring 
others to cool his own fervent love — 'Non fare ad altrui 
quel che non vuoi per te, Do not to others that which 
thou would'st not like thyself. 

TJ altrui, used substantively, means the property of 
others: as, lo non invidio mai 1' altrui, I never covet 
the properly of others. 

Altro or Altra is joined with the personal pronouns 
Noi and Voi in an expletive manner for the sake of 
emphasis: as, Noi altri Inglesi (mas.) Noi altre Jnglesi 
[fern.) We English — Voi altri Italiani [mas.) Voi altre 
Italiane [fern.) You Italians. 

Altro, substantively employed, conveys the meaning 
of some thing else, any thing else; but when repeated in 
the same sentence, the repetition signifies one thing. . . 
another thing, or two different things. 

Non ho hisogno d' altro. I do not want any ihimj else. 

Altro e il parlar di morlc, al- It is one thing lo talk of death, 
tro il morire. and anolher lo die. 

NB. When Altro is followed by che in a negative 1 
sentence, it means nothing but, except or otherwise: as, ( 



76 - 



Cio non pud esservi altro che utile, That cannot be 
otherwise than useful to you. 

Uuno e V altro, whatever article or preposition may 
be employed with uno, must be repeated with altro, 
and when it is in the Nominative case, the verb must 
be in the singular : as , Ho ricevuto lettere dalF uno e 
dalF aitro, I have received letters from both — L' uno e 
r altro mi odia, Both hate me. 

Vun V altro, invariably used with a reflective verb, 
is always in the accusative case v/ith altro sometimes 
in the genitive, or governed by a preposition: as, Essi 
si odiano Tun F altro, e per con&egubnza sono invidiosi 
Fun delF altro, They hate each other and consequently 
are envious one of the other. 

L' uno r altro — Per uno , have no peculiarity to 
notice : Ex. Ne il padre ne il figlio e venuto, ma V uno 
o F altro verrd dimani , Neither the father nor the son 
have come, but one or the other will come to-morrow 
— Diedi loro due soldi per uno, I gave them two pence 
each. 

Ne Vuno ne V altro requires a negative particle, when 

placed after a verb, but not when placed before: as, 

Ne F uno ne F altro merita lode , or non merita lode ne 

1 F uno ne F aitro. Neither the one nor the other merits 

praise. 

In all these cases uno, altro, vary their gender and 
number according to the substantives to which they 
have reference: as, Vidi il padre e la figlia, ma ne Funo 
ne F altra voile riconoscermi, I saw the father and the 
daughter, but neither of them would recognize me. 

Some one, Some and Any, referring to an antecedent 
in the plural, are rendered by qualcheduno or qualcuno 
in the singular, or by alcuno in the plural, and agree 
with the antecedent in gender : as, I have visited the 



V 



i 



officers, and have found some of them wounded, Ho 
visitato gli ufflziali, e ne ho trovato qualcuno ferito, or 
alcuni feriti. 

Some, Any, joined adjectively to a substantive, are 
expressed hj' qualche in the singular or by alcuno in 
the plural : as. You must take some books, Bisogna 
che prendiate qaalche libro, or alcuni lihri. 

Nessuno, Niuno, Veruho, NuUo, require the negative 
non when they follow the verb, but not when they 
precede it: as, Nessuno e piu infelice di lui, ma non vidi 
mai nessuno piu rassegnato di lui. No one is more un- 
fortunate than hB is , but I never saw any one more 
resigned (than he is). 

The same pronouns used after a verb without a 
negative, in phrases expressing something doubtful or 
conditional, signify any, or any body: as, Avete veduto 
nessuno? Have you seen any body? But it will be better 
to say, Avete veduto qualcuno? 

Nepur uno, placed after the verb, requires a negative, 
but not when before it : as, Ne pur uno venne, or non 
venne ne pur uno, Not one came. 

Niente and Nulla come under the same rule with 
respect to the negative, as also in conditional or doubtful 
expressions without a negative: as. Nulla mi fa sperare. 
Nothing makes me hope — Non mi disse niente. He told 
me nothing — Non so nulla, I do not know any thing — 
Volete nulla? Will you have any thing? In this last 
example it will be better to say: Volete qualche 
cosa ? 

Adjectives following niente take di: as, Niente di 
buono ne di cattivo. Nothing good or bad. 

Nullo, meaning null or void, is a mere adjective and 
makes in the plural 7iulli, nulle: as, Quelle leggi furono 
rcse nuUe, Those laws were rendered null. 



7* 



- 78 



Qs^aaeasa 12. 

I know neither of your nephews, but I know bofli 
conosco so che 

serve in the same regiment — If any person knew that 
serve » sap esse 

I I 

you have not kept your word, you would not be 
manlenulo saresle 

S 2 

believed by any one again — Your cousin and your sister 

creduto piii 

i I 

promised me to come, but I do not believe either of 
promisero credo 

them, altho' both deserve credit — If your brothers 

merili fede 
keep the secret, I have promised them ten guineas 
mantengono promesso 

each — I have seen your son's books, but I have found 
some of them forbidden — Do you know any thing of 

proihilo 
that affair? I do not know any thing, except that no one 
excuses your son — Have you received any letters? 

scusa ricevulo 

2 I 5 

Not one of the many I expected — We should never 

aspellava dohbiamo 

speak ill of others , nor of any thing belonging to them — 

dir 

Nothing was seen except sky and water — Any one 

si vedeva 

knows your intention, he said, but I answered 

conosce disse risposi 

him, that it is one thing to pretend to know and another 

[Dat.) 



I 



- 79 ~ 

to know truly — She neither says nor does any thing 

dice fa 
well — They have seen those plants, and they have 
buono pianla 

found some which have not (taken root) — The orders of 

alignato 

the general were void, for no soldier would fight — 

perche voile ballersi 

2 I 

It is not always well to act (according to) the wishes of 

Vagire secondo voglia 

others. 



LESSON XIII. 

INDEFINITE FBONOUNS CONTINUED. 

Ciascheduno, ciascheduna. i Every one, 

Ciascuno, ciascuna. \ Each, Every. 
Ognuno, ognuna. Every one, Every body. 

Taluno, taluna, chi. Some one, Some body. 

Sxue^. auA,P\uT. 

Tulto, tutta; tutti, tutte. All, Whole. 

Quanto, quanta; quanti, quante. As much as; As many as. 

Tanto, tanta; tanti, tante. So much as; So many as. 

Qualsisia, qualsisiano. i Whatsoever, 

Qualsivoglia, qualsivogliano. f Any Whatever. 

Tale. Such. 

Tale che, tale .... quale Such as. 

Parecchi, parecchie. Several. 



- 80 — 

Ogni. Each, Every. 

Chiunque, chicchessia. Whoever, Whosoever. 

Checchessia, checche, per, 

per quanto. 
Qualunque, qualunque cosa. Whatever. 



Whatever, Whatsoever. 



Ciascuno abbreviated from Ciascheduno, employed 
substantively, refers to persons only: adjectively used, it 
is applied both to persons and things. 

Ciascuno disse it suo parere. Every one spoke his opinion, 

Ciascun soldato si balle con JEac/i soldier fought with va- 

valore. lour. 

Ciascun ai&ero comincia a spun- Every tree begins to put forth 

tar le foglie. leaves. 

Ognuno, Chiunque, Chicchessia are used substantively 
and are applied to persons only: as, Ognuno di noi rac- 
conterd una novella , Every one of us will tell a tale — 
Chiunque par/erd di lei. . . Whoever will speak of her. . . 
Non mi euro di chicchessia , I do not care for any person 
whatever, 

Taluno is used substantively referring to persons 
only : as, 5e taluno mi dicesse una sola parola. . . If some 
one would tell me a single word.... 

Chi is taken in a distributive sense: as, Passeggia- 
vano per le s trade portando chi flori, chi erbe odorifere, 
e chi diverse cose, They walked about the streets some 
carrying in their hands flowers, some sweet herbs, and 
others diflferent things. 

Tutto is used substantively in the sense of every 
body: as, Tutti pensavano cost, All thought so — Era 



— 81 — 

piaciuta a tutti la novella della Fiammettay They have 
all been pleased with the tale of Fiametta. 

With or without the article, it is used substantively 
in the sense of whole or every thing. 

eXAMPJLES. 

Ne so il tutto. I know the whole of it. 

Ella rispose e racconto il tulto. She answered and told every 

thing. 

II Signor Fenton fard di lutto Mr. Fenton will do every thing 

per compiacervi. to satisfy you. 

La Contessa S. e il tutto a The Countess S. is every thing 

Corte. at Court. 

It is used as an adjective with the article after it : 
as , Alia Signora Wells la cura di tutta la nostra fatni- 
glia commetto, I intrust to Mrs. Wells the care of all 
our family. 

As an adjective it is used also with personal pronouns 
in the plural: as, Noi tutti or tutti noi, All of us — Voi 
tutte or tutte voi, All of you. 

It is used as an adverb in the sense of quite^ entirely, / 
agreeing with the following noun : as. La donna tutta \ 
furiosa rispose, The Lady replied quite in a rage — Egli J 
era tulto pallido, He was quite pale. 

Tutto, joined with quanto, signifies all without P 
exception: as, Tutte quante dormivano, They were all ] 
of them asleep — Tutti quanti perirono , Every one of j 
them perished. ^ 

Qualunque, Qualsisia etc. are apphed both to persons 
and things : as, Qualunque donna lo dice, Whatever lady 
says so — Qualunque dolor e ei provi, non posso giovar- 
gli. Whatever grief he suffers, I can be of no use 
to him. 



- 82 — 

Checchessia or Checche is used by itself: as, Chcc-' 
chessia il suo ragionamento non mi persuaderd mai, 
Whatever may be his argument, he will never per- 
suade me. 

Whatever, However, are expressed by per when an 
adjective follows: as, However rich he may be I am not 
afraid of him, Per ricco che sia nol temo. 

Tale is often used for one or some: as, Tale venne in 
figura del Re di Francia, tale del Re d' Inghilterra, One 
came in the disguise of the king of France, one in that 
of the king of England. 

It is used as a relative pronoun, when it refers to 

something which has been said before: as, Tale fu mia 

cruda sorle, Such was my cruel lot. 

) It is often joined with another pronoun signifying 

\ particular, same, said: as, Non ho ancora veduto quel 

\ tali libri, I have not seen those [said) books. 

It is used adjectively like such : as , Tale fu la mia 
intenzione, Such was my intention. 

It is used alone having a substantive understood, 
such as ajfanno, tribulation; dolore, affliction; something 
disastrous being always meant: as, A tal m' ha condotlo 
mia cruda sorte , To such a plight has my cruel lot 
conducted me. 

Ogni is invariable in both genders and is only em- 
ployed in the singular: as, Ogni uomo— Ogni cittd — 
Ogni catnpo, Every man — Every city — Every field. 

The following expressions Every other day — Every 
third day — Every fortnight , are rendered by Ogni due 
giorni — Ogni tre giorni — Ogni quindici giorni, and are 
not exceptions, because spazio di, space of, is to be 
understood. 

The other pronouns have no peculiarity deserving 
of notice. 



I 



- 83 — 

(^^(^(aQQSS 13. 

When all had finished, every one went home — 

ehbero finilo ando {Dal.) 

r '' 

My confidence is placed in that man who loves all my 

fosla ama 

family so much — They came home quite hot, and 

[Dat.) sudalo 

spoke to no one — "When the son heard the father 

parlarono udi 

say « all is known to me » he said nothing more — All 

noto rispose 

of them remained under those ruins — Each one related 

rimasero racconlo 

a tale, and every eighth day, they assembled in that same 

si ragunarono 

spot — All your care will be useless, because every 

luogo sard 

one believes him guilty — Whoever comes, tell him 

crede reo venga 

I am not at home — If you come to-morrow, you 

in verrete 

1 

(will find) me at any hour — Whatever he may say , do 

troverele dica 

1 

not listen to him, because he is such a violent person, 

dale rella 

2 1 2 1 

that he makes every body mad , and on his account 
fa impazzare per causa 

2 

I am now brought to such a plight — Whatever your 
giunlo 

3 I 3 14 5 2 

riches ( may be ) , you will never persuade him 
siano indurrele 



- 84 — 

fo do as you wish) — However poor I (may be), I do not 
al voslro volere sia = 

want iiim - Lady Seymour is a Lady whom I 
ho hisogno {Gen.) — — Signora 

have found exactly such as Mr. Reynolds has described 
trovala oppunlo — descriUa 

3 4 12 

her to me: if you go (to her house) some evening, you 

andrele da lei - 

(will find) several of your friends there. 

Iroverete 



|}Ck 



A Verb is a part of speech which signifies existing, 
acting or sustaining an action. It has persons, moods and 

tenses. 

Verbs have two numbers, the singular and the plural, 
and three persons, which have already been explained 
in the personal pronouns. It must be remembered that 
all substantives, either proper or common are of the 
third person, when not addressed or spoken to. 



There are four Moods in the Conjugation of Verbs, viz. 

1. The Infinitive Mood affirms in an indefinite manner 
without either number or person: as, Amare, To love — 
Aver amato, To have loved. 

2. The Indicative Mood simply indicates and asserts 
a thing in a direct manner: as, 1o amo, I love. 

3. The Imperative Mood is used for commanding, 



- 83 — 

exhorting, requesting or reproving: as, Ama, Love 
(thou) — Amiamo, Let us love. 

4. The Subjunctive Mood subjects a thing to that 
which precedes: as, Voi volele ch' egli ami, You wish 
he may love. 

There are three tenses. The present declares a thing 
now existing or doing: as, Jo leggo, 1 read. The past 
denotes that the thing has been done: as, lo ho letto, I 
have read. The future expresses that the thing will be 
done: as, lo leggero, I shall read. But they are subdi- 
vided, so that there are several different preterite and 
two future tenses. , 

There are five kinds of Verbs. The active; passive; 
intransitive or neuter; reflective or pronominal^ and im- 
personal 

The Verb active is that which expresses an action, 
the object of which is either declared or understood : as, 
Amar Dio, To love God — Amar lo studio, To love 
study. The object of this action is called regimen or 
accusative of the Verb Active. 

In the Italian Language the Passive Verbs are sup- 
plied by the Verb Essere, as they are in English by the 
verb To be, and the participle past of the verb active 
followed by one of the particles of the Ablative, viz. da, 
dal, dallo, dalla: dai, dagli, dalle, the Nominative and 
Accusative being reversed. Thus to change the Verb from 
active to passive in the following sentence, Mio padre 
vi ama, My father loves you, it must be rendered thus, 
Voi siete amato da mio padre, You are loved by my father. 



lo mi yenlo I repent. 

Ta li fenli Thou lepeiilest. 

EcjU si yenie He repents. 



Noi ci pcnliamo We repenl. 
Fo^ vi penlile You repent. 
Eijlino si penlono They repent. 



The Impersonal Verb is only used in the third person 
singular without a pronoun, and has no relation to any 
person or thing beyond itself: as, Nevica, It sno>ys — 
Tuona, It thunders. 

There are three Conjugations in Italian which are 
easily distinguished by the termination of the Present 
of the Infinitive. 

The first \ ! are — as, AMARE, To love. 

— second | ending in | ere— ii TEMERE, To fear. 

— Ihird ) ( ire— ii SEMIRE, To feel. 

There are two auxiliary Verbs: Avere, To have, and 
Essere, To be. 



- 86 ~ . 

The Verb Intransitive is that which expresses an 
action whose effect remains in the subject or nomina- 
tive, consequently it has no direct regimen or Accusative 
as the Verb active: as Andare^ To go — Piacere, To 
please, is likewise an intransitive Verb; we cannot say 
in Italian Piacere quale heduno, but Piacere a qualche- 
chino, To please somebody. 

The Pronominal or Reflective Verbs are those in | 
which each person is conjugated throughout all the 
tenses with its corresponding conjunctive personal pro- ^ 
noun in the accusative case. 






CONJUGATIONS OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS 
.^VERE, To iu§ve AND ESSEUE, Vo- hc* 



liNFINITIVE MOOD, 



PRESENT. 



Averc, To have 



£ssere, To be (L] 



GERUND 



Avendo, Having 



Essendo, Being 



FARTXGIFLS PAST. 



Aviilo, Had 



Stalo, Been (2) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



1 \ia\)e, dc. 

lo ho 
Tu hai 
Egli ha 
Noi abbiamo 
Yoi avele 
Eglino hanno 



1 am t\c. 

lo sono 
lu sei 
Egli e 
Noi siamo 
Voi sieto 
Eglino sono 



(1) The reader must observe that the compound tenses of the verb Es- 
sere are not formed , as in English , by the help of Avere , To have, but of 
Essere, To be. So that instead of saying, / /im'c been j J had been etc. the Ita- 
lians say — / am becn^ I was been , Sono stato, era sfato. 

(2) Slato agrees in gender and number with the nominative: as, lo (a man) 
sono slato J lo (a woman) sono slata , Noi (men) siamo stall j Noi (women) 
siaino stale. 



— 88 — 



IMPERFECT. 



1 Wvd dc. 

lo aveva 
Tu aveyi 
Egli aveva 
Noi avevamo 
Voi avevate 
Eglino avevano 



PRETERITE. 



1 ^\ad e\c. 

lo ebbi 
Tu avesti 
Egli ebbe 
Noi avemmo 
Voi aveste 
Eglino ebbero 



1 xv)as e\c. 

lo era 
Tu eri 
Egli era 
Noi eravamo 
Voi eravale 
Eglino erano 



1 was dc. 

lo fiii 
Tu fosti 
Egli fu 
Noi fummo 
Voi foste 
Eglino furono 



] 



FUTURE. 



I sWU ov wUl \xmt eVe. I sWU oy mU ))t dc. 



lo avro 
Tu ayrai 
Egli avra 
Noi avremo 
Voi avrete 
Eglino avranno 



lo saro 
Tu sarai 
Egli sara 
Noi saremo 
Voi sarete 
Eglino saranno 



COKDXTXONAL. 

I sAiould \mu dc. 1 sWvi\d ))e, do. 



lo avrei 
Tu avresli 
Egli avrebbe 



lo sarei 
Tu saresti 
Egli sarebbe 



89 



Noi avremmo 
Yoi avreste 
Eglino avrebbero 



Noi saremmo 
Voi sareste 
Eglino sarebbero 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 



Rcv\^e< \\\ou «,\c. 



Be \\\ou dc. 



Abbi tu 
Abbia egli 
Abbiamo noi 
Abbia te voi 
Abbiano eglino 



Sii tu 

Sia egli 

Siamo noi 

Siate voi 

Siano or sieno eglino 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



FRESEMT. 



IWVl ma'^ \\axe, do. 

Che io abbia 
Che tu abbi 
Ch' egli abbia 
Che noi abbiamo 
Che voi abbiale 
Ch' eglino abbiano 



Che io sia 

Che tu sii 

Ch' egli sia 

Che noi siamo 

Che voi siate 

Ch'eglino siano or sieno 



IMPERFET. 



TW\ 1 mu^\\Y Axav^e, e.\c. 



TWl 1 m\^)\l \ii tk. 



Che io avessi 
Che lu avessi 
Ch' egli avesse 
Che noi avessimo 
Che voi aveste 
Ch' eglino avessero 



Che io fossi 
Che lu fossi 
Ch' egli fosse 
Che noi fossimo 
Che voi foste 
Ch' eglino fossero 
, 8* 



— 90 



INFLEXIOiNS OF the 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



Araare, To love. 



Si's 



Present ends in 

Gerund 

Participle .... 



dre 

^ndo 

ato 



SVu^uAav 



ist pers. 2dpers. Sdpers. 



j Pres. ends in o 



ist pers. 2d pers. 3d pers. 
iamo 6te ano 



o 

o 


1 Imperf. ... 


6va 


Avi 


dva 


av6mo 


avdle 


dvano 


^ 














A 


^ 


/ 












. ..■ 


s> 














^H 




\ 














C3 


J Preter. ... 


6i 


dsli 


6 


^mmo 


&sle 


firond ' 




1 Fl'TDRE. ... 


ero 


erdi 


era 


er6rao 


er^te 


erdnno 




\ Gondii. ... 


er6i 


er6sli 


er6bbe 


er^mmo 


er6sle 


er^bbero 




Imperative ... 


— 


a 


i 


i^mo 


dte 
«= — - 


ino -" 


• -4 


\ Present.... 


• 

1 


i 


i 


i^mo 


idle 


ino 


5S ,2 


1 Imperf. ... 


^ssi 


dssi 


dsse 


^ssimo 


6sle 


dsscro 



/ The verbs of the first conjugation are both the most numerous and 

} the most regular. They amount to about seven thousand, out of which 
only four primitive verbs are irregular. 



91 — 



REGULAR VERBS. 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



Temerc, To fear (1). 




Present ends in 

Gerund 

Participle . . . 



6re 
6ndo 



V\u vaA . 



istpers. 2dpers. odpers. ist pers. 'id per s. 3dpers. 



o 



Pres. ends in o 
6va 

Imperf. ... or 
6a 
ei 

Preteb. ... or 
etli 

Future. ... er6 

CoNDiT. ... er6i 

Imperative ... — 



j,"« I Presext.... 



^J^ 



Imperf. 



a 
6ssi 



6vi 



6sli 

er^i 
er6sti 

i 

a 
6ssi 




i^mo 



6le 



evamo evale 



6n[)mo 6ste 

er6mo erete 
er6mmo er6slc 

i6mo 6te 



a 
6sse 



lamo 
6ssimo 



iale 
6sle 



ono 
I 6vano 

6ano 
Srono 

or 

61(010 
e ran no 
er6bbero 

ano 

ano ' 
6ssero 



(1) Verbs of Ihe second conjugation dififer in ihe acccniing of their infinitive: 
some being pronounced long, that is, wilh the accent on ere , as temere: others 
short, that is, with the accent on a preceding syllable, as credere. 
The following, wilh their compounds, have ere long: . 



Cadere 


To fall 


Sedere 


To sit down 


Calere 


To care 


Solera 


To be accustomed 


Dovere 


To owe 


Suadere 


To persuade 


Dole're 


To grieve 


Tacere 


To be silent 


Giace're 


To lie down 


Teme're 


To fear 


Godere 


To enjoy- 


Ten ere 


To hold 


Parere 


To seem 


Valere 


To be worth 


Piacere 


To please 


Vedcre 


To see 


Potere 


To be able 


Volere 


To be willinf^ 


Sapcre 


To know 







All other verbs of ihis terminjliun have ere short. 






o 



Si 

cs 

IS 



92 



INFLEXIONS OF the 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



First Class: as Sentire, To feel. 



Present ends in 


Ire 






Gerund 


6ndo 






Participle . . . 


ito 






Swc^xiVaT. 




PIUTOV. 




ist pers. 


2,dpers. 3d pers. 


1st pers. 2d pers. 


3d pers. 


Pres. ends in o 


i e 


iamo He 


ono 


iva 


Iva 


I 


Ivano 


Imperf, ... or 


Ivi or 


ivamo iv6tc 


or 


ia 


ia 


1 


lano 



Preter. ... 11 



Future. .. 

CONDIT. .. 



iro 
irei 



Imperative. ... — 






Present.... 
Imperf. ... 



a 

Issi 



fsli 

irai 
ir6sli 

i 

a 

issi 



iia 
ir6bbe 



a 

Isse 



Immo Isle 

ir6mo ir6te 
ir6mmo ir6ste 



iAmo 

iAmo 
Issimo 



ite 

idte 
Isle 



Irono 

irAnno 
irebbero 

ano 

ano 
Issero 



The most regular form of the third conjugation, according to anal- 
ogy with the other two, is that of sentire: but the verbs thus inflect- 
ed being very few, it has been found convenient to admit another 
form, not perfectly analogous, viz. that of finire, upon which a con- 
siderable number are inflected. 

The following are the whole of the regular verbs of the first class 
of this conjugation, inflected like sentire only. 



Consentire 


To consent 


Sentire 


To feel 


Cucire 


To sew 


Sdrucire 


To rip 


Disservire 


To disserve 


Servire 


To serve 


Dormire 


To sleep 


Svestire 


To undress 


Scucire 


To uHsew 


Vestire 


To dress. 



93 



REGULAR VERBS. 



THI&D GOK1UGA.TZON. 



Second Class: as Finire, To finish. 



it\ 


Present ends in 
Gerdnd 


t|( 


Participle. 


• • " 




Sw^uW. 






1st pers 


1 


Pres. ends in 


isco 


• 




iva 


1 \ 


Imperf. ... 


or 


^ 




ia 


1 { 


Preter. ... 


fi 




Future. ... 


ir6 


\ 

\ 


COPIDIT. ... 


ir6i 


Imperative ... 


— 




Present.... 


isca 




Imperf. ... 


issi 



Ire 

6ndo 

ito 

Mpers. Sdpers. 
isci isce 

iya 
iTi I or 

fa 



isti 

irdi 
ir6sli 

isci 

isca 
issi 



i 

ird 

ir6bbe 

isca 

isca 
Isse 



PWo\. 
Isi pers. 2d pers. M pers. 
i^mo ite iscono 

fvano 
iv^mo iY^te } or 

iano 



Immo Iste 

ir6mo ir6le 
ir6mmo ir6sle 



idmo 

i^mo 
issimo 



ite. 



i^le 
Isle 



irono 

ir^nno 
ir6bbero 

iscano 

iscano 
issero 



Verbs conjugaled both like sentire and finire. 

The following take the regular inflexions of both classes, making 
converto , or convertisco, etc. 



Aborrire 

Dimentire 

Inghiottire 

Investire 

Languire 

Nutrire 



Convertire 

Forbire 

Inverdire 

Lam hire 

Mentire 

Partire 



Pent ire 

Rinverdire 

Ripentirsi 

Smentire 

Tossire 



Perire 
River dire 
Riveslire 
Sortire 
Trayestire 



All other verbs in ire , not in the table of irregular verbs, are 
conjugated like finire only. 



- 94 - 



EX^PLAMATIOiViS 



Relating to the Tables ot Irregular Terks. 



1. The leltcr R means regular, and denotes that 
the tense, where it is placed, is formed like the regular 
verbs. 

2. The letter D means defective: for instance, solere 
has no inflexions in several tenses so marked. 

3. Most of these verbs have three persons of the 
preterite of the indicative irregular ; the first person 
singular ending always in i w hich is changed into e for 
the third person singular, to which the syllable ro is 
added for the third person plural; while the other three 
persons of that tense follow the regular manner of in- 
flexion from the Infinitive; for this reason, the first 
person singular only is given. 

Example in A.cct\\dcYc. 

IxYcq. lo acces-i. 
Keq. Tu accendesti. 
\\ni\. Egli acces e. 
Vs.iiy Noi accendemmo. 
Kc^. Voi accendeste. 
1yy«(\. Eglino accese-ro. 



— 93 - 

In other tenses, where the first person singular only 
is given, all the persons are derived from it according 
to the regular mode. This applies to each formation 
when there is more than one, as in bevo, beo, which 
have all the persons derived from both, bevo, bevi , etc. 
beo, bei, etc. 

Any deviation from these general principles of in- 
flexion is noted in the tables. 

4. The compound verbs which differ from their 
primitives are mentioned; but not those which follow 
Ihem: for instance, riandare and res tare are noticed as 
ditTering from andare and stare; but contraffare, dis fa- 
re ^ rifare; being conjugated hke fare throughout, are 
not noticed. 

5. A considerable number of verbs have two ter- 
minations of their infinitive, and are in consequence in- 
flected in two conjugations; for instance, 

Applaudere, applatidire, to applaud: 

The former is irregular and defective in the second 
conjugation: but is regularly inflected [in isco] in the 
third, in which it is most used. 

Adempiere, adempire, to fulfil; compiere, compire, 
to complete; take the regular inflexions of the second 
conjugation, from the one termination, and of the third 
(in isco) from the other. 

Amongst the verbs taking both forms of the third 
conjugation, it is to be observed that sorlire has ils in- 



— 96 — 

flexions in isco when it signifies (o chuse, elect, or share 
by lot; and is inflected like sentire, when used in a mil- 
itary sense: 

I nemici sorlono sovenle contro di noi, 
The enemy frequently sally out against us. 

Tossire f to cough — its inflexions in isco prevail 
in conversation, and those in o in writing. 

6. The irregular verbs of the second and third con- 
jugations assume difl'erent modes of inflexion according 
to the different combinations of their infinitive termina- 
tion, some of those having several verbs belonging to 
them inflected differently from each other. 

A view of the whole of these combinations is here 
given, with a corresponding verb of every variety of 
inflexion, by way of index to the foUoving Tables. 



— 97 



TERMIMTIOJXS OF IRREGILAR VERBS. 



fSECOIVD COMjFUCi^lLTBOM. 



Acere 


see giacere 


Egnere 


see spegnere 




cadere 




i divellere 


Adere 


— invadere 


Ellere 


~ I espellere 




radere 




( svellere 


Aere j 
Arre j 


— trarre 


Empiere 


— empiere 
accendere 


Agnere 
Alere 


— fragnere 

— valere 


Eudere 


fendere 
j prendere 
[ rendere 


Andere 


— spandere 




Anere 


— rimanere 


Enere 


— tenere 


Angere j 
Agnere \ 


— frangere 


Erdere 
Ere 


— perdere 

— here 


Apere 


— sapere 




( aspergere 


Ardere 


— ardere 


Ergere 


— ergere 


Arere 


— parere 




mergere 


Argere 


— spargere 


Erpere 


— serpere 


Arre 


— trarre 


Erre see 




Ascere 


1 nascere 


Egliere 




1 pascere 


Ertere 


~ invertere 


Audere 


— applaudere 


Ervere 


— fervere 


Ecere 


— lecere 
/ cedere 


Escere 


\ crescere 
1 mescere 


Edere 


I ledere 

j sedere 




[ connettere 
I fletlere 




[ vedere 


Etlere 


— } genuflettere 


Eggere 


— leggere 




j mettere 


Egliere j 
Erre j 


scegliere 
~ scerre 
svellere 


lacere 


[ riflettere 
— giacere 



— 98 



Idere 


I assidersi 

see I 

i decidere 


Orbere 
Orcere 


see assorbere 
— torcere 


ledere 


I chiedere 
/ riedere 


Ordere 
Orgere 


— mordere 

— porgere 


Igere 


I dirigere 
) esigere 


Orre j 
Onere ( 


I porre 
I ponere 


Iggere 


— figgere 


Orre see 






comprimere 


Ogliere 




Imere 


— dirimere 


Orrere 


— correre 




' redimere 


Oscere 


— conoscere 


Incere 


— vincere 


Otere 


— potere 


Indere 


— scindere 


Overe 


— dovere 


Ingere i 


cingere 


Uadere 


— suadere 


Ignere \ 


stringere 


Ucere 


— rilucere 


Inguere 


— distinguere 


Udere 


— alludere 


lovere 
Islere 


— piovere 

— assistere 


Uggere 


\ struggere 
} suggere 


Ivere 


( scrivere 
/ vivere 


Ugnere see 
Ungere 




Odere 


( godere 


Ulgere 


— rifulgere 




f rodere 


Umere 


— assumere 


Ogliere i 
Orre | 


1 cogliere 
1 corre 


Ungere 1 
Ugnere j 


— giungere 


Olere 


dolersi 
solere 


Uocere 


i cuocere 
f nuocere 




volere 


Uotere 


— scuotere 


Olgere 


— V olgere 


Uovere 


— muovere 


Olvere 
Ompere 


j assolvere 
/ risolvere 
— rompere 


Urgere 
Urre i 
Ucere \ 


— surgere 

— addurre 


\. 


ascondere 


Utere 


— discutere 


Ondere 


— fondere 
rispondere 







— 99 



TERMINATIONS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



Tfflll&D eOMJUOATIOIV. 



Alire 


see salire 


Ertire 


see avvertire 


Ambire 


— ambire 




1 dire 


Aprire 


— aprire 


Ire 


— 1 gire 


Ardire 


— ardire 




( ire 


Arire 


— apparire 


Offrire 


— offrire 


Aurire 


— esaurire 


Olire 


— olire 


Dire 


-- dire 


Ollire 


— bollire 


Eguire 


— seguire 


Oprire 


— aprire 


Ellire 


— seppellire 


Orire 


— morire 


Empire 
Enire 


— empire 

— venire 


Struire 


\ construire 
\ costruire 




[ digerire 


Udire 


— udire 


Erire 


— [ offerire 
' profferire 


Uggire 


_ \ fuggire 
\ muggire 


Ernire 


— schernire 


Uscire 


— uscire 



100 — 



IRREGULAR VERBS 



1 



PlYSCUl 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 






0^ \U 












Pve-stuY 


ImptT^. 


P\xVmU 


¥u\uYt 


Cou^xl. 




vo or vado 






andro 


andrei 




vai 










(1) ANDARE 


va 










To go 


andiamo 
andate 


R 


R 






- 


yanno 












do 




detti or diedi 


daro 


darei 




dai 




desti 






DARE 


dk 




dette or diede 






To give 


diamo 

dale 

danno 


R 


demmo 

deste 

deltero or diedero 








fo or faccio 


faceva 


feci 


fard 


farei 




fai 




faces ti 






FARE 


fa 




fece 






To do 


facciamo 

fate 

fanno 




facemmo 

faceste 

fecero 






• 


sto 




sletti 


stard 


starei 


(2) Stare 
To stand 


stai 
sta 


R 


stesti 
stette 






(3; 


stjamo 




stemmo 






stale 




slesle 




A 




stanno 




stetlero 







i 



(1) Riandaie J to go again, is irregular, like andare, RiandarCj to examine, is re- 
gular. 

(2) Reniaik. The verb starCj is also used to express the place of abode, or habitation. 
— Ex: Where do you live? Do^'e state voi? 



1 


— 101 — 
OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 




t 

1 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Gtvvvwd 


PllYWc'lp. 


Pvtstul 


imi^u^. 


i 

,va 
yada 
andiamo 
andale 
Tadano 


vada 

yada 

vada 

andiamo 

andiate 

vadano 


R 


R 


R 


da — -^ 

dia 

diamo 

date 

diano 


dia 

dia 

dia 

diamo 

diate 

diano 


dessi 

dessi 

desse 

dessimo 

deste 

dessero 


R 


R 


1 

fa ^^ — 

faccia 
facciamo 
fate 
facciano 


faccia 

faccia 

faccia 

facciamo 

facciate 

facciano 


facessi 

facessi 

facesse 

facessimo 

faceste 

facessero 


facendo 


falto 


sta ^~^ 

slia 

stiamo 
kslale 
sliano or slieno 


stia 

stii 

stia 

sliamo 

stiate 

sliano or slieno 


slessi 

stessi 

slesse 

slessimo 

stesle 

stessero 


u 


R 



(3) Rislare, to slop, irregular, like stare. Restare^ to remain, regular. 





— 102 

IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Pttstul 


ImipcY^. 


PrdmU 


¥u\\VYC 


Couilu 


(1) 

ACCENDERE 

To kindle 


R 


R 


accesi 


R 


R 

1 


ADDURRE , 

(2) 

ADDUCERE , 

To bring 
To alledge 


adduco 


adduceva 


addussi 

adducesti 

addusse 

adducemmo 

adduceste 

addussero 


addurro 


addurre 


ALLUDERE 

To allude 


R 


R 


allusi 


R 


R 


APPLAUDERE 

To applaud 


R 


R 


M p. sing. 
applaudesti 
Bd p. sing. 
applause 
2d p. plur. 
applaudeste 
Bd p. plur. 
applausero 


R 


R 


ARDERE 

To burn 


R 


R 


arsi 


R 


R 


ASCONDERE 

To hide 


R 


R 


ascosi 


R 


■ R 

1 



(1) Prendere , dipendere, propendere, are regular, like credere j impendere also, its 
participle /wpcio and impendulo GXce^lGA. All other veiLs of this termination , as tenderCy 
difenderc , etc. are irregular, like accendere. 



— 103 -- 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



lmi^au\V\)C- 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Gwwud 


PafVxdip. 


Vn%i\\\ 


Im^iT^. 


R 


R 


R 


R 


acceso 


adduci 


adduca 


adducessi 


adducendo 


addolto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


alliiso 


R 


R 


R 


R 

- 


D 




R 


R 


R 


arso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


t 
ascoso 

ascoslo 


I 

(2) The infiui 
lost of their inflcxic 


live termination ucere 
)ns arc derived from it 


J in this and olh 


er verbs, is obs 


jlete, although 



? 



— 104 - 



IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 






pYestwl 


Im^Q.'v^. 


PTt\m\c 


¥u\u¥t 


Coi\A/vl. 


ASPERGERE 

To sprinkle 


u 


R 


aspersi 


R 


R 


(1) 

ASSIDERSI 

3b sit down 


D 


D 


mi assisi 


D 


D ! 

1 


ASSISTERE 

To assist 


R 


R 


R - 


R 


1 

R 


ASSOLVERE 

To absolve 


R 


R 


assolvei 
assolvetli 
assoisi — -^-— ^ 


R 


R 


ASSORBERE 

To absorb 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


ASSUMERE 

To assume 


R 


R 


assunsi *-^ * 


R 


R 


BERE, or 
BEVERE 

To drink 


bevo 


beveva 


bevvi , * — ^" " 
bevei , or 
bevetli 


bero 

or 
bever6 


berei 

or 

beyerei 


CADERE 

To fall 


R 


R 


caddi 


cadro 

or 

cadero 


cadrei 

or 

caderei 


CALERE 

{ impers. ) 
To care 


3d p. sing. 
cale 


3. p. sing. 

caleva 

3 p. pi. 

calevano 


3d p. sing, calse 
3. p. pi. calsero 


3. p. sing, 
calera 
or 
carr^ 


3. p. sing. 
calereb- 
be or 

carrebbe 
1 



(I) Eicept in ihe preterite and participle, assidersi is not used, but sedere. 



— lOo 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 




lmT[)e,Tcil\\)e, 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


GcYuud 


PtVYl\d\). 


Paxsm\1 


lmT^w'\. 


R 


R 


R 


R 


asperso 


D 


D 


D 


D 


assiso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


assislito 


R 


R 


R 


R 


assoluto 
assolto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


assorto 1 
absorto ^ 


R 


R 


R 


R 


assunto 


bevi 


beva 


beyessi 


bevendo 


bevuto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


3(2. p. sing, caglia 


3d. p. sing, caglia 


3d p. sin</. 
calesse 


calendo 


caluto 



106 



IRREGULAR VERBS 



PY«.se,ul 




mDICATIVE MOOD. 






PYtsml 


Imipev^. 


PYdmVi 


FuluYfc 


Coud,\\. 


CEDERE 

To yield 


R 


R 


cedei 
cedetti 
cessi obs. 


R 


R 


(1) CHIEDERE 

To ask 


R 


R 


cbiesi 


R 


R 


(2) CINGERE 

To gird 


R 


R 


cinsi 


R 


R 


COGLIERE , 
CORRE 

To gather 


colgo , or 
coglio 
cogli 
coglie 
cogliamo 
cogliele 
colgono or 
cogli ono 


coglieva 


colsi 


cogliero 
or 
corro 


coglierei 
or 
correi i 


COMPRIMERE 

To compress 


R 


R 


corapressi 


R 


R 


CONNETTERE 

To connect 


R 


R 


connessi or 
connettei 


R 


R 


COIVOSCERE 

To know 


R 


R 


conobbi «.-- « 


R 


R 


CORRE RE 

To run 


R 


R 


corsi 


R 


R 


CRESCERE 

To grow 


R 


R 


crebbi 


R 


R 



(1) Richiedere has the participle richiedulo and richiesto. 



107 

OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 




Xwx'^uiyXwi 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Gtmud 


PavUcxp. 


Vn%i\\\ 


Imi^u^. 




R 


R 


R 


ceduto 
cesso, 065. 


R 


R 


R 


R 


chieslo 


R 


R 


R 


R 


cinto 


1 cogli 

CO ga , coglia 
1 cogliamo 
1 cogliele 

colgano,cogliano 


colga, coglia 
colga, coglia 
colga , coglia 
cogliamo 
cogliate 
colganOjCOgliano 


cogliessi 


cogliendo 


colto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


compresso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


connesso 


1 R 


R 


R 


R 


conosciuto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


corso 


It - 


R 


R 


R 


cresciulo 



(2) For verbs ending in tringere , see stringerc. 





108 

IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Vn%i\\X 


Imi^tT^. 


PYdtntt 


FulUTC 


Coudi^ 


CUOCERE 

To cook 


cuoco 

cuoci 

cuoce 

cuociarao 

cocete 

cuocono 


coceva 


cossi 

cocesti 

cosse 

cocemmo 

coceste 

cossero 


cocero 

• 


cocerel 


(I)DECIDERE 

To decide 


R 


R 


decisi 


R 


R ' 


BIRIGERE 

To direct 


R 


R 


diressi - 


R 


R 


DIRIMERE 

To divide 


R 


R 


R 


R 


1 

R 


DISCUTERE 

To discuss 


R 


R 


discussi 


R 


R 


DISTINGUERE 

To distin- 
( guish 


R 


R 


distinsi ^ - 


R 


R 


t 

DOVERE 

To owe 


devo, debbo 
or deggio 
devi, dei 
deve, debbe, 
or dee 
dobbiamo, 
or deggiamo 
dovete 
devono, 
debbono, 
deggiono 
or deono . 


R 


R 


dovro 


dovrei' 

1 



(1) Stridere i to shriek, is regular. 



109 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



Im^tYaVx've, 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Ge-tuud 


PeiYlVd-^. 


VniiwX 


Impe-Y^. 


■ - ■■ 

juoci 

3U0ca 

30ciamo 

jocete 

cuocano 


cuoca 

cuoca 

cuoca 

cociamo 

cociate 

cuocano 


cocessi 


cocendo 


cotto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


deciso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


diretto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


D 


R 


R 


R 


R 


discusso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


distinto 


3 

i 

D 


debba , deva , 

deggia 

debba, deva, 

deggia 

debba , deya , 

deggia 

dobbiamo , deg- 

giamo 

dobbiate deggiate 

debbanodeggiano 


R 


R 


R 



10 





— 110 — 

IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Pttsn\t 


ImptY^. 


PYt\m\e, 


¥uluY«, 


C*ouA,x\ 


• 

DOLE RSI 

To grieve 


mi dolgo, or 
mi dogiio 
ii duoli 
si duole 
ci dogliamo 
vi dolete 
sidolgono or 
si dogliono 


R 


mi dolsi 


mi doird 


midorrc 

1 

, ■] 

i 


ERGERE 

To erect 


R 


R 


ersi 


R 


R 


ESIGERE 

To exact 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


ESPELLERE 

To expel 


R 


R 


espulsi 


R 


R 

1 


X 

FENDERE 

To cleave 


R 


R 


fendei J 


R 


R 


FERVERE 

To be hot 


R 


R 


. R 


R 


R 


(1) FIGGERE 

To drive in 


R 


R 


fissi or 
fisi 


R 


R 


(2j FLETTERE 

To bend 


D 


D 


D 


D 


D ^ 


(3) FONDERE 

To melt 


R 


R 


fusi or 
fondei 


R 


R 















(1) Olher verbs endiug in iggere make only issi in the preterite, itto in the parti- 
ciple: Imt affliggera J crocifggere.j prejiggere make their participle in isso. 

(2) See geniijleltere and rifUtlere. 

4 



J 



— Ill — 

OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 




Imi^Mulwc 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Gtvvuvd 


Pa\Vid\). 


Vn%i\\\ 


ImijiW^. 


iaoliti 

iolgasi, dogliasi 
logilamoci 
ioletevi 
olgansi,dogliansi 


mi dolga, mi do- 
glia 

ti dolga, ti doglia 
si dolga, si doglia 
ci dogliamo 
vi dogliale 
si dolgano, si do- 
gliano 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


erello 
erto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


esatto _ 


R 


R 


R 


R 


espulso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


fenduto 
fesso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


D 


R 


R 


R 


R 


fitto 
fisso 
fiso 


D 


D 


D 


D 


flesso 


« 


R 


R 


R 


fuso 
fonduto 


(3) Its conipou 
n Ihe participle. 


mds have only the iir 


egular termination 


s usi in the pre 


lerilc, and uso 



— 112 — 



IRREGULAR VERBS 





INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Pttstul 


ImptT^. 


PtdmU 


YuluTt 


CoudVV 


(t) 

FRANGERE , 
or FEAGNERE 

To break 


II 


R 


fransi 


R 


R 


(2) 

GENUFLET- 
TERE, 

To bend the 
knee 


R 


R 


genuflessi 


R 


R 


GIACERE 

To lie down 


giaccio 

giaci 

giace 

giacciamo 

giacete 

giacciono 


R 


giacqui 


R 


i 
R 

t 


GODERE 

To enjoy 


R 


R 


R 


goder6 

or 

godrd 


goderei 
or 1 
godrei 


(3) 

GIUNGERE , 
GIUGNERE 

To arrive 


R 


R 


giunsi 


R 


R 


INVADERE 

To invade 


R 


R 


inyasi 


R 


R 


INVERTERS 

To overturn 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 



(1) Angere, to grieve, has no inflexion except nngc, 3d pers, sing, of ihe Indica- 
tive Present j and is confined to poetry. 

(2) CirconJIeltere and injleltere follow genii/Ietterc : riflellere differs. 



— 113 — 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



ImipwaVix)?, 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


GtTuud 


PaxVidp. 


Ptestul 


Imipu^. 


R 


R 


R 


R 


franto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


genuflesso 


fiaci 

•iaccia 

fiacciamo 

•iacete 

:iacclano 


giaccia 

giaccia 

giaccia 

giacciamo 

giacciate 

giacciano 


R 


R 


giaciuto or 
stato a 1 
giacere ^ 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


gianto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


invaso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


inverso 


•1 











(3) Verbs ending in ungere may transpose the g, and n, when an e or a « follows; as , 
iungere or giugnere: gitinge or giiigne: gittngi or g'mgnim 

10* 





114 
IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Pvesml 


ImptY^. 


"PYC.\m\«. 


FutUYt 


CoudU 


LECERE, 

(obsolete) 
To be lawful 


3d p. sing, 
lece , ( it is 
lawful) 


D 


D 


D 


D 

1 


LEDERE 

To offend 


R 


R 


lesi 


R 


j 

R 


LEGGERE 

To read 


R 


R 


lessi 


R 


R 


MERGERE 

To plunge 


R 


R 


mersi 


R 


R 


MESCERE 

To mix 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 1 


METTERE 

To put 


R 


R 


misi or 

mettei infre- 

messi quent. 


R 


R 


MORDERE 

To bite 


R 


R 


morsi 


R 


R 

i 


WLOVERE, 
or 3I0VERE 

To move 


muovo 

muovi 

muove 

moviamo 

movete 

muovono 


moveva 


mossi '^....^v 

movesti 

mosse 

movemmo 

movesle 

mossero 


moverd 


movere 

1 

1 
1 


NASCERE 

Tr; be borti 


R 


R 


nacqui 


R 


R 



1 


~ 


115 — 






P OF THE SECOND GONJUGATIOiN. 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






- lmpwaVi\3e. 




Gtvuutl 


PtvvVidij). 








Vn%u\\ 


Im-i^w^. 






D 


D 


D 


D 


lecilo 


R 


R 


R 


R 


leso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


lello 


R 


R 


R 


R 


merso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


misto 
mesciuto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


messo 


R 


R 


R 


R 


morso 


31 


rauova 


movessi 






nuoTi 


muova 






nuova 


muoya 






noYiamo 


moviamo 


moyendo 


mosso 


novele 


moviate 








nUOYBDO 


muoyano 








R 


R 


R 


R 


nalo 





— 116 — 
IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Vu%i,\\\ 


Imij^w^. 


PxdtnU 


¥u\uYe, 


CoudiY 


NTJOCERE 

To hurt 


nuoco 

nuoci 

nuoce 

nociamo — 

nocete 

nuoGono 


noceya 


nocqui 

nocesti 

nocque 

nocemrao 

noceste 

nocquero 


nocero 


nocerei 


PASCERE 

To feed 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


PARE RE 

To appear 


paio 

pari 

pare 

paiamo 

parete 

paiono 


R 


parvi 


parro 


parrei 


PERDERE 

To lose 


R 


R 


perdei 
perdetti or 
persi 


R 


u 


PIOVERE 

To rain 


R 


R 


pioTvi or piovei 


R 


R 


(IjPORGERE 

To offer 


R 


R 


porsi 


R 


R 


PORRE 

To put 

PONERE 

(obsolete) 


pongo 

poni 

pone 

poniamo 

ponete 

pongono 


poneva 


posi 

ponesti 

pose 

ponemmo 

poneste 

posero 


porrd 


porrel 



(1) Sorgere, to rise follows porgere. 



— 117 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



i 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Ge-xuud 


PavWdip. 


Pte-stul 


Imi^tT^. 


auoci 

luoca 

nociamo 

aocete 

auocano 


nuoca 

nuoca 

nuoca 

nociamo 

nociate 

nuocano 


nocessi 


nocendo 


nociulo 


R 


R 


R 


R 


pasciuto 


)arl 

)aia - • 

)aiamo "'— ^ 

parete 

)aiano < 


paia 

paia 

paia 

paiamo 

paiale 

paiano 


R 


R 


paruto 


R 


R 


R 




perduto 
perso 


D 


R 


R 


1 - ■■ 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


porto ^ 


i 

»oni 

longa 

loniamo 

»onete 

»ongano 


ponga 

ponga 

ponga 

poniamo 

poniate 

pongano 


ponessi 


ponendo 


poslo 



i 





^^^ IRREGULAR VERBS 




1 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 


PxiLstul 


lmp?.T\. 


PxdmVt 


"FulUTt 


CoudW 


POTERE 

To be able 


posso 

puoi 

puo, puote 

possiamo 

potete 

possono 

or ponno 


R 


R 


potrd 


potrei 

1 


(1) 

PRENDERE 

To take 


R 


R 


presi or 
prendei 


R 


R 


RADERE 

To shave 


R 


R 


radei or rasi 


R 


R 

1 


REDIMERE 

To redeem 


R 


R 


redimei or 
redensi 


R 


R 


R^NDERE 

To return 


R 


R 


rendei 
rendetti or 
resi 


R 


R 


RIEDERE 

To return 


riedo 

riedi 

riede 

3d. p. plur. 

riedono 


D 


D 


D 


1 

D 1 


RIFLETTERE 

To reflect 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 


RIFULGERE 

To shine 


R 


R 


rifuisi 


R 


R 



(1) The compounds oi prendere usually make the preterite in esi. 



— 119 — 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



- 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






lmi^t'vaVv\)c 






GtYuud, 


PaYV\d\>. 








Pvtstul 


Imipe^Y^. 








possa 










possa 








D 


possa 

possiamo 

possiate 


R 


R 


R 




possano 








R 


R 


R 


R 


preso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


raso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


redento 










reso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


renduto 




rieda 








iedi 


rieda 








ieda 


rieda 


D 


D 


D 


d p. plur. 


3d p. plur. 








iedano 


riedano 
















rifleltuto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


riflesso 


R 


R 


R 


R 


D 













■ 


■ 


^r^-^120 "^^^^^B 




^^^^^^^H 1 


^B 


^^T" IRREGULAR VERBS ^~ 

• 




^H 


Pve-se-ul 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 






0^ S\\t 










PYtse,u\ 


ImptY^. 


PvdmU 


Fuluve. 


Coudx\:= 


RILUCERE 






rilussi or 






To shine 


R 


R 


rilucei 


R 


R 




rimango 




rimasi 


rimarro 


rimarrei 




rimani 








n 


RIMANERE 


rimane 








n 


To remain 


nmaniamo 
rimanete 


R 










rimangono 


^ 






■- 


RISOLVERE 






rlsolvei or 






To resolve 


R 


R 


risolsi 


R 


R 


RISPONDERE 

To answer 


R 


R 


risposi 


R 


R 


RODERE 

To gnaw 


R 


R 


rosi 


R 


R 


ROMPERE 

To break 


R 


R 


ruppi -" 


R 


R 




SO 




seppi 


saprd 


saprei i9 




sai 








• fi 


SAPERE 


sa 








11 


To know 


sappiamo 

sapete 

sanno 


R 






1 




scelgo ' ' 


sceglieva 


scelsi 


sceglier6 


sceglie- ( 




scegli 








rei t 


SCEGLIERE 


sceglie 




. 




IE 


or SCERRE 


scegliamo 








;e 


To choose 


scegliete 
scelgono 
or scegliono 






^ 


1 



— 121 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



lmi^t'\'aU'«e 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Gtxuud 


PavWdp. 


Pxe.sc;Ul 


Imi^e^T^. 


R 


R 


R 


R 


D 


iniani 

imanga 

imaniamo 

imanete 

imangano 


rimanga 

rimanga 

rimanga 

rimaniamo 

rimaniate 

rimangano 


R 


R 


rimaso ( 

rimasto *^, 


R 


R 


R 


R 


risoluto 


R 


R 


R 


R 


risposto 


R 


R . 


R 


R 


roso 


• " 


R 


R 


R 


rotto 


ppi 

ppia 

ppiamo 

ppiate 

ppiano 


sappia 

sappia 

sappia 

sappiamo 

sappiale 

sappiano 


R 


R 


R 


■pgli 

blga, sceglia 

ligliamo 

iigliete 

iilgano 

^gliano 


scelga 

scelga 

scelga 

scegliamo 

scegliate 

scelgano 

scegliano 


scegliessi 


scegliendo 


scelto 



11 



» 


— 122 - 
IRREGULAR VERBS 


- 






INDICATIVE MOOD. ! 


Vn^iwX 


ImptY^. 


Vn\ix\U 


¥u\uYt Coudi^ 


(1) SCINDERE 

To separate 


R 


R 


scissi »-»-«^ 


R 


R 

1 
i 


SCRIYERE 

To write 


R 


R 


scrissi 


R 


R 


SCUOTERE 

To shake 


scuoto 

scuoli 

scuote 

scotiamo 

scotete 

scuotono 


scoteYa 


scossi 

scotesti 

scosse 

scotemmo 

scoteste 

scossero 


scoler6 


scoter( 

s 

i 
.i 

15 


SEDERE 

To sit down 


siedo, seggo 
or seggio 
siedi 

siede , si6 
sediamo or 
seggiamo 
sedete 
siedono 
seggono or 
seggiono 


R 


R 


sedero 
sedro 

• 


sedere 
sedrei 

ill 

!i( 

lie 

lie 


SERPERE 

To creep 


serpo 

serpi 

serpe 

3d p. plur. 

serpono 


scrpeva 
serpevi 
serpeva 
3d p. pi. 
serpevano 


D 


D 


D 'ie 
lid 


(2) SOLERE 

2't; be wont 


soglio 

suoli 

suole 

sogliamo 

solele 

sogliono 


R 


D 


D 


D 

1 


(1)Prwc 


indere is regular. 


discinderBj r 


escindere are irregular. 




■'' 



123 — 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



Imi^e-valV^e, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PycscuI 



ImptY^. 



Gemud 



Ptvvluxip. 



R 



R 



R 



icuoti 

icuota 

icotiamo 

cotete 

cuotano 



scuota 

scuota 

scuota 

scotiamo 

scotiate 

scuotano 



R 



R 



R 



R 



scotessi 



scotendo 



iedi 

ieda segga 

ediamo 

eggiamo 

edele 

edano e seggano 



sieda segga seggia 
sieda segga seggia 
sieda segga seggia 
sediamoseggiamo 
sediate seggiate 
siedano seggiano 



R 



R 



scisso 



scritto 



scosso 



R 



erpi 

Brpa 

arpiamo 

d p. pL serpano 



serpa 

serpa 

serpa 

serpiamo 

3dp.pl. serpano 



D 



D 



D 



D 



soglia 

soglia 

soglia 

sogliamo 

sogliate 

sogliano 



R 



R 



solito 



(2) The simple tenses which are wanting, are supplied l)y the parliciple and auiiliary; 
, I was wont, /hi" solito. 





124 
IRREGULAR VERBS 




1 


= 


\ufimVx\)e. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 




Vn%<i\\\ 


lAKl-^tT^. 


PTdmYe, 


Yulwe, 


CoudU 


= 


SPANDERE 

To spread 


R 


R 


spandei or 
spandetti 


R 


R 


- 


SPARGE RE 

To diffuse 


R 


R 


sparsi 


R 


R 




SPEGNERE 

To extin- 
guish 


spengo 

spegni 

spegne 

spegniamo 

spegnete 

spengono 


R 


spensi 


R 


R 


sp 
sp 
sp 
sp 
sp 
sp 


STRINGERE , 
STRIGNERE 

To bind 


R 


R 


slrinsi 


R 


R 


. 


STRUGGERE 

To melt 


R 


R 


sirussi 


R 


R 


- 


(l)SVELLERE, 
SVERRE 

To pluck out 


svello, syelgo 
svelli 
svelle 
svelliamo 
svellete 
svellono or 
svelgono 


svelleva 


sveisi ''^ — ^ 

svellesti 

svelse 

svellemmo 

svelleste 

svelsero 


syellero 


svellere 

1 
1 


iTe 
iTe 
?e 


SDADERE 

To persuade 


R 


R 


suasi 


R 


R 


- 


SUGGERE 

To suck 


R 


R 


R 


R 


R 




(1) nisvi 

makes the prete 

1 


igliere J disvellen 
rile eonvellei ; ih 


3 J disverre., a 
s participle , cc 


Uvcgliere J diverre, foUoi 
nvulso'i ia other parts it 


iv svellere: 
is regular. 


convcllerc 

1 





- 125 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



lmipcmVx\3e/ 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PaxscuI 



Imi^c'Y^. 



Gtnvud 



PaTlxdip. 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



spaaduto 
spanto 



sparso 



hpegni 
j penga 

pegniamo 

pegnete 

'pengano or 

pegnano 



spenga 

spenga 

spenga 

spegoiamo 

spegniate 

spengano or 

spegnano 



R 



spenlo 



R 



R 



R 



slrello 



)■ 






R 



velli 

fella svelga 

relliamo 

vellete 

rellanosyelgano 



R 



R 



svella svelga 
svella svelga 
svella svelga 
svelliamo 
svelliate 
svellanosvelgano 



R 



svellesi 



R 



R 



svellendo 



R 



strulto 



svello 



suaso 



D 



:: 



\v 







— 126 ~ 








IRREGULAR VERBS 






"Pxese^wl 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 




i 


0^ l\\«, 










VmiwX 


\mi^^. 


PxdmU 


FulUTfc 


Coudxl. 


SURG ERE 






• 






To rise 


R 


R 


sursi — '• 


R 


R j 




tengo 




tenni <__ 


terrd 


t 

terrei 




tieni 






'■- 




TENERE 


tiene 


D 








To hold 


teniamo 

tenete 

tengono 


K 








TORCERE 












To twist e 


R 


R 


torsi 


R 


R 




traggo 


traeva 




Irarrd 


trarrei 




trai traggi 












trae 




trassi 




1 


TRARRE , 


tragge 




traesti 




I 

t 


TRAERE 


traiamo 




trasse 




I 
1 


To draw 


traggiamo 
traete 
traggono 
tranno 




traemmo 

traeste 

trassero 




I 

I 
t 




valgo 




vaisi 


varro 






vaglio 








■ 




Tali 










VALERE 


vale 








Ti 


To be worth 


valiamo 
valete 
valgono 
vagliono 


R 






R W 



— 127 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 





SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






ImijitTaW'Vfc 






GauA\d 


Pa^Vxaip. 








PYe.seu\ 


Imi^e-Y^. 






R 


R 


R 


R 


surto ---^ 




tenga 








tieni 


tenga 








tenga 


tenga 


D 


n 


R 


teniamo 


teniamo 








tenete 


teniate 








teogano 


tengano 








R 


R 


R 


R 


torto 


i ' - 


tragga 


traessi 






Irai, traggi 


tragga 








tragga 


tragga 




traendo 


Iratto 


'.raiamo 


traiamo 








-raggiamo 


traggiamo 








traete 


traiate traggiate 








traggano 


traggano 










valga Taglia 








rali 


yalga Taglia 








^alga vaglia 


valga vaglia 


R 


R 


valuto 


'^aliamo 


valiamo 








^alete 


valiate 








'algano vagliano 


valgano vagliano 











— 128 — 
IRREGULAR VERBS 








o\ l\\e, 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 




"Pxtse-uY 


X'w^iA' 


PteUnU 


FuluYe. 


Couilil. 


1 


(1) VKDERE 

To see 


Yedo 

Yeggo or 

veggio 

Yedi Ye' 

Yede 

Yediarao 

Yeggiamo 

Yedete 

Yedono 

Yeggono 

veggiono 


R 


vidi 


Yedr6 


vedrei 


Te( 

w, 

ye 

I 

yet 


YIWCERE 

To vanquish 


R 


R 


Yinsi 


R 


R 




VIVERE 

To live 


R 


R 


Yissi ' 


YiYero or 
Yivrd 


Yiverei 
or Yivre 


" 


(2) VOLERE 

To be wil- 
ling 


voglio YO' 

Yuoi yuo' or 

Yuoli 

Yuole 

YOgliamo 

Yolete 

YOgliono 


R 


YOlli^ 


Yorrd 


Yorrei 




VOLGERE 

To turn 


R 


R 


Yolsi 


R 


R 


i 


(1) Jnth 
ihe other com] 


>edere ,. wvedersi 
rounds of vedere 


J, rivedere ma 
J in arb j erei. 


ke the future in drb j lh( 


J condiliona 


1 in drei: 


f 

on 



— 129 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



\mi^e,Ta\we, 



SUBJUNCTIYE MOOD. 



Ptc-su\\ 



Impc^T^. 



Ge-Tuud 



Pa^Udp. 



vedi ye' 
veda yegga 
feggia 
vediarao yeggia- 

mo 
redele 

redano veggano 
feggiano 



B3' 



R 



R 



D 



R 



veda Yegga 

Yeggia 

Yeda Yegga 

Yeggia 

Yeda vegga 

veggia 

vediamo veggia- 

mo 
Yediate yeggiate 
yedano veggano 
yeggiano 



Yoglia 

YOglia 

Yoglia 

YOgliamo 

vogliate 

YOgliano 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



yedendo 
yeggendo 



R 



R 



R 



yeduto 
yisto 



yinlo 



vivuto 
yissuto 



R 



YOllO 



(2) yolsi is llic proper prclerllc of volgerej but has been soinelimes used in poetry 
)r that of vole re. 



... > 



130 



IRREGULAR VERBS 







INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PTe,scu\ 



Imi^e-T^. 



PifdmU 



YuluYe. 



Coudil 



APPARIRE 

To appear 



APRIRE 

To open 



apparisco 
apparisci 
apparisce 
appare •** 
appariamo 
apparite 
appariscono 
appaiono - 



apro 



(t) ARDIRE 

To dare 



AVVERTIRE 

To warn 



BOLLIRE 

To boil 



CONVEBTIRE 

To convert 



ardisco 

ardisci 

ardisce 

D 

ardite 
ardiscono 



avverto 
aYvertisco 



bollo 

bolli 

bolle 

bogliamo 

boUite 

bollono 



converto 
convertisco 



apparu / 

apparvi or f : 
apparsi 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



aprii or 
apersi 



R 



R 



convertii or 
conversi ■*„, 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



R 



(1) The deficiences of ardire may be supplied by osare j or ai>ere ardinienlo j as, noi 
osiamo J ox abbiamo ardimento j we dare. ^ rdiamo j ardiate j ardendo j ardenlCj heloog to 
euderCj lo burn. 



— 131 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



lmi^waV\\)e 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


G«,YuuA 


Pattidij). 


Pvistul 


Imipe-'v^. 


apparisci 
apparisca appaia 
appariamo"' 
apparite 
appariscano 
appaiano -— - 


apparisca appaia 
apparisca 
apparisca appaia 
appariamo 
appariate 
appariscano ap- 
paiano 


R 


R 


apparilo 
apparso 


apri 


apra 


R 


R 


aperto «— 


ardisci 
ardisca 

D 

ardite 
ardiscano 


ardisca 
ardisca 
ardisca 

D 
D 

ardiscano 


R 


D 


R 


avvertiavvertisci 


avverla aTverli- 
sca 


R 


R 


R 


bolli 

bolia 

bogliamo 

bollite 

boUano 


bolla 

bolia 

bolla 

bogliamo 

bogliate 

bollano 


R 


R 


R 


jonverti conver 
1 tisci 


coiiyerta conver- 
tisca 


R 


R 


convertilo 
converso 



|iii 





132 
IRREGULAR VERBS 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Vn^iwX 


Im^tY^. 


PvdmU 


1 


Goud.\\ 


CONSTRUIRE, 

or 

(1) COSTRUIRE 

To construct 


construisco 
or costiuisco 


R 


construii ; 
costruii f 
construssi V 
coslrussi 


R 


R 


DIRE 

To say 


dico 

dici di' 

dice 

diciamo 

dite 

dicono 


diceva 


dissi 

dicesli 

disse 

dicemmo 

dicesle 

dissero 


dir6 


direi 


DIGERIRE 

To digest 


digerisco 


R 


R 


R 


R 


{2} EMPIRE 

To fill 


empisco 


empiva 


empii 


erapiro 


empire! 


ESAURIRE 

To exhaust 


esaurisco 


R 


R 


R 


R 


FDGGIRE 

To flee 


fuggo 


R 


R 


R 


R 


(3) GlRE 

To go 


\st p. pi. 

giamo 

2d p. pi. gile 


R 


R 


R 


R 


IRE 

To go 


Mp. pi. ile 

• 


Ut. p. sin. 
iva dd p. 
sin. iva 
3d p. pi. 
ivano 


2d p. sin. isti 
3d p. pi. iro, ir 


Xst.p.pl. 

iremo 
2d p. pi, 

irete 
3d p. pi. 

iranno 


1 1 

3d p. pL 
iriano 


(i) Costr 
(2) Empi 
conjugation. 


aire , istriiire are 
ere, to 611 j riei 


pi'eferred to c 
ipiere , to lefi 


onstriiire, instruire. 

1; are both regularly d( 


'clined in t 


le second 

i 

1 
■ t 



— 133 — 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION- 



Imi^w^aVwit 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 



l?Ytsn\l 



Impu^. 



Gwuud 



(2) GirCj where defective , may he supplied l)y anclare. 



Pavlxdi^, 





conslruisci 
costruisci 


construisca 
costruisca 


R 


R 


construilo 
costruilo 
construilo 
^^rutto 


1 


di' 

dica 

diciamo 

dite 

dicano 


dica 

dica 

dica 

diciamo 

diciate 

dicano 


dicessi 


dicendo 


detlo ""^ 


~T 


digerisci 


digerisca 


R 


R 


digerito 
digesto 


R 


I R 


R 


empissi 


R 


empito 




esaurisci 


esaurisca 


» 


R 


esaurilo 
esausto 




fuggi 


fugga 


R 


R 


R 




\st p. pl. giamo 
2d p. pl. gite 


lstp.pl. giamo 
2d p. pl. giate 


R 


D 


R 


]0 


2d p. pl. ile 

,1 . 

1 


D 


D 


D 


ito 


■d 


I 




/ 







12 



— 134 



IRREGULAR VERBS 



Pycsc.\\\ 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 






0? l\u 














VniiwX 


Imi^tY^. 


P\e.\mU 


YuUux 


Goi\d\,\. 


MORIRE 

To die 


muoro 

muoio 

muori 

muore 

muoriamo 

muoiamo 

morile 

muorono 

muoiono 


R 


R 


morro 

or 

raoriro 


morrei 

or 

morirei 


MUGGIRE 

To belloiu 


muggisco 


R 


R 


R 


R 


OFFERIRE or 
OFFRIRE 

To offer 


offerisco 
olTro 


offeriva or 
offrlYa 


offerii 
offrii or 
offers! ^=-™-~» 


offeriro 

or 

offrird 


offerirei 

or 

offrirei 


OLIRE 

To smell 
sweet 


D 


oliva 
oliyi 
oliva 
3d p. pi. 
olivano 


D 


D 


D 


PROFFERIRE 

To utter 


profferisco 


R 


profferii or 
proffers! 


R 


R 


SALIRE ^ 

To go up 
To ascend 


salgo salisco 

sali salisci 

sale salisce 

sagliamo(l) 

salile 

salgono 

saliscono 


R 


salii or 
salsi 


R 


R 


SCHERMRE 

To deride 


schernisco 
scherno 


U 


R 


R 


R 



(1) Saliamo, l)cing an inflexion oi salarCj to salt, is used for sagliamo, improperly. 



- 133 — 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Im^walwc 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Ge^Yuui) 


PaxlVd^. 


Pvcstul 


ImptY^. 


muori 
; muora, muoia 
iTmoriamo muoia 

mo 
^ morite 
muorauo muoia 
no 


muora muoia 
muora muoia 
muora muoia 
muoriamo muo 

iamo 
moriale muoiaie 
muorano muoia 

no 


R 


R 


morto 


muggisci 


muggisca 


R 


R 


R 


offerisci ofifri 


oflerisca offra 


oflFerissi 
offrissi 


offerendo 
ofifrendo 


offerlo 


D 


D 




D 


D 


profferisci 


profferisca 


ii 


R 


R 


sali salisci 

saiga salisca 

sagliamo 

salite 

salgano 

saliscano 


saiga salisca 
saiga salisca 
saiga salisca 
sagliamo 
sagliate 
salgano saliscano 


R 


R 


R 


schernisci 
scherni 


schernisca 
schema 


R 


R 


R 





~ 136 — 
IRREGULAR VERBS 




■ 


Pvcseul 


■ ■ : 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Pttseul 


ImTpw^. 


PYdmYfc 


¥u\UTfc 


CoudU. 


(1) SEGUIRE 

To folow 


seguo 

sieguo 

segui 

siegui 

segue 

siegue 

seguiamo 

seguite 

seguono 

sieguono 


R 


R 


R 


R 

i 


SEPPELLIRE 

To bury 


seppellisco 


R 


R 


R 


R 


UDIRE 

To hear 


odo 

odi 

ode 

udiamo 

udite 

OdODO 


R 


R 


R 


« 
R 


VENIRE 

To come 


vengo 

vieni 

viene 

veniamo 

venite 

vengono 


R 


venni u -< 


verrd 


1 

verrei 


USCIRE 

To go out 


esco 

esci 

esce 

usciamo 

uscite 

escono 


R 


R 


R 


R 



(t) Its compounds, conseguire, etc. are conjugated Loth irregularly, like seguire, and 
regularly, hke Jtnire : this latter mode is preferable. 







137 — 








OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






Im^cvalwe, 




Ge-Tuud 


l?ad\di^. 






. 


Pve-sml 


Imi^tY^. 








segua siegua 








segui siegui 


segua siegua 








segua siegua 


segua siegua 


R 


R 


R 


seguiamo 


seguiamo 








seguite 


seguiate 








seguaao sieguano 


seguano sieguano 








seppellisci 


seppellisca 


R 


R 


seppellito 
sepollo 




oda 








odi • 


oda 








oda 


oda 








udiamo 


udiamo 


R 


R 


R 


udite 


udiate 








odano 


odano 










venga 








vieni 


venga 








Yenga 


venga 


R 


R 


venulo 


veniamo 


veniamo 








venite 


veniate 








Tengano 


vengano 










esca 








1 esci 


esca 








1 esca 


esca 












R 


R 


R 


1 usciamo 


usciamo 








1 uscite 


usciate 








! escano 


escano 






12* 



/ 



138 



IRREGULAR VERBS 

OF TBB SBGOND GOHJVGATION. 

Those verbs, though numerous, as the foregoing tables 
have shown, may be considerably reduced in variety, by 
observing that, amongst many of them, there is uniformity 
in their irregularity, so that they may be classed according 
to rules , of which the most general are these four. 

I. Such of them as have the first person of the indica- 
tive present in ggo, change the gg into ss in the preterite, 
and into (( in the participle, as in the following. 



PTestuY T;«.us&. 


PfdmU. 


PaiflVcxiijlfc. 


Traggo 


trassi 


tratto 


Eleggo 


elessi 


elelto 


Reggo 


ressi 


relto 


Affliggo 


afilissi 


afflitto 


Configgo 


confissi 


confillo 


Trafiggo 


traGssi 


trafllto 


Struggo 


strussi 


strutlo 


Distruggo 


distrussi 


dislrulto 



Some few deviate a little from this uniformity. 



Figgo 
Afflggo 



fissi 
affissi 



fitto, and fisso 
affisso 



The following, though not exactly constructed like the 
preceding, preserve the analogy of their mode of variation. 



Pvtstul Tfcuse. 


PYdmU. 


PatUd^V. 


Dico 


dissi 


detlo 


Ciioco 


cossi 


cotto 


Adduce 


addussi 


addotto 


Conduco 


condussi 


condollo 



139 



Induco 


indussi 


indollo 


Introduce 


introdussi 


introdollo 


Riduco 


ridussi 


ridolto 


Scrivo 


scrissi 


scriUo 


Imprimo 


impressi 


impresso 


Esprimo 


espressi 


espresso 


Opprimo 


oppress! 


oppresso 


Reprimo 


repress! 


represso 


Muovo 


mossi 


mosso 


Scuoto 


scossi 


scosso 


Riscuoto 


riscossi 


riscosso 


Percuoto 


percossi 


percosso 


Concedo 


concessi j 


concesso , and 
conceduto 


Vivo 


Yissi 


vissulo, and 
vivulo 




II. Such verbs as have the first person of the indicative 
present in do^ (with a vowel before d) make the preterite 
in sif and the participle in so. 



\ 



Ptestul Tmse. 


?TdmU. 


PavViciipU. 


Persuado 


persuasi 


persuaso 


Assido 


assisi 


assiso 


Conquido 


conquisi 


conqulso 


Divido 


divisi 


diviso 


Recido 


recisi 


reciso 


Uccido 


uccisi 


ucciso 


Rido 


risi 


rise 


Rodo 


rosi 


roso 


Chiudo 


chiusi 


chiuso 


Inlrudo 


inlrusi 


inlruso 



The following deviates in its participle. 
Chiedo chiesi 



chiesto 



III. Those which have the first person of the present in 
endo, make the preterite in si, and the participle in so, drop- 
ping the n. 



'\ 



140 — 



.stul "llfcUSt. 


PwYmU. 


PaTt\c\^\t. 


Accendo 


accesi 


acceso 


Ascendo 


ascesi 


asceso 


Apprendo 


appresi 


appreso 


Tendo 


tesi 


teso 


Stendo 


stesi 


steso 


Attendo 


attesi 


atteso 


Contendo 


contest 


conteso 


latendo 


intesi 


inleso 


Difendo 


difesi 


difeso 


Offendo 


ofFesi 


ofiFeso 


Spendo 


spesi 


speso 


Sospendo 


sospesi 


sospeso 


Prendo 


presi 


preso 


Riprendo 


ripresi 


ripreso 


Spando 


spasi 


spaso,andspanto 




Those in ondo have the same formations, with little 
jilfference. 



Pws«,uY Ttuse. 


PwlmU. 




PaTlVdi^U. 


Fondo 


fusi 




fuso 


Rifondo 


rifusi 




rifuso 


Profondo 


profusi 




profuso 


Gonfondo 


confusi 




confuso 


The following 


deviate in their participle. 




Nascondo 


nascosi 


1 


nascoso, and 
nascosto 


Rispondo 


risposi 




risposto 



The following may be added as analogous 



Pongo 


posi 


posto 


Metto 


misi 


messo 


Prometto 


promisi 


promesso 


Commelto 


commisi 


commesso 



Also other compounds of mello, ammello, dimello^ fram- 



4 



— 141 — 

mettOy intromeltOf permettOf rimetto, scommetlOy sprometlo, 
trasmetto , etc. 



IV. Verbs having one of these three liquids, ?, n, r, 
before the last syllable in that person and tense, make the 
preterite in si, and the participle in lo, retaining such liquid. 



Pt^swI TItuse,. 


PYtlmU. 


PaYlxdi^U 


Scelgo 


scelsl 


scelto 


Divelgo 


divelsi 


divelto 


Colgo 


colsi 


colto 


Sciolgo 


scioisi 


sciolto 


Tolgo 


toIsi 


tolto 


Volgo 


volsi 


voUo 


Rivolgo 


rivolsi 


rivollo 


Frango 


fransi 


franto 


Piango 


piansi 


pianto 


Spengo 


spensi 


spenlo 


Cingo 


cinsi 


cinto 


Dipingo 


dipinsi 


dipinto 


Fin go 


finsi 


finto 


Spingo 


spins! 


spinto 


Sospingo 


sospinsi 


sospinto 


TiDgo 


tinsi 


tinto 


Distingue 


distiusi 


dislinlo 


Estinguo 


estinsi 


estinto 


Giungo 


giunsi 


glunto 


Ungo 


UDSi 


unto 


Mungo 


munsi 


munto 


Pungo 


punsi 


punto 



Some few in mo take this formation. 



is»,^,«i'»afflws.=i 



Consumo 
Presumo 



consunsi 
presuDsi 



consunto 
presunto 



Also assumOy desumo, riassumo. 





— 142 — 




n%t\\\ Teusi. 


PTtUnU. 


PaxVxdi^U. 


Torco 


torsi 


lorto 


Accorgo 


accorsi 


accorlo 


Scorgo 


scorsi 


scorto 


Porgo 


porsi 


porto 


Sorgo 


sorsi 


sorto 


Surgo 


sursi 


surto 



The following are exceptions with regard to the parti- 



ciple. 



Ardo 


arsi 


Mordo 


morsi 


Spargo 


sparsi 


Aspergo 


aspersi 


COITO 


corsi 


Ricorro 


ricorsi 


.«^-» *!*«« Stringo 


strinsi 


Dolgo 


dolsi 


Perdo has 


persi 
perdei 


(which two last 


are preferable.) 



srso 

luorso 

sparso 

asperso 

corso 

ricorso 

stretto 

dolulo 

perso and 

perduto 



Exceptions both in the preterite and participle. 



I! 



Rimango 


rimasi 


rimasto 


Pongo 


posi 


posto 


Tengo 


tenni 


tenuto 



(and their compounds in the like manner.) 



Other variations of these verbs being rather peculiar 
than general, any reduction of them to rules would require 
much minuteness, and appear too complicated to be of ade- 
quate benefit: the student may therefore be referred to the 
Tables wheie they are set forth. 



41 



143 - 



LESSON XIV. 



> 



OBSERVATIOVS 

Ou'WouVA,, SVtouVd, CouVd, Ou(^\\l, M.\cij\v\. 

These words are employed in English as auxilia- 
ries, or as Verbs: as auxiliaries they are not expressed 
in Italian, but serve only for the imperfect subjunctive, 
and conditienal. As verbs they are espressed by 
Volere Would 

Polere Could 

Dovere Ought or Should 

These Verbs are defective in English, and are supplied by 
To be willing Y^lere o 

To be able Polere 

To be obliged Dovere 

By conjugating them with the auxiliary to he. the 
pupil will be able to ascertain their tenses. 
The classification of tenses is thus. 





IMDIOAT. 




SUB J. 






Imi^. 


VnX. 


\mi^. 


CoudVl. 


Would 


Yoleva, 


volli, 


volessiy 


vorrei. 


Might or Could 


Poleva , 


potei, 


polessi, 


polrei. 


Ought or Should 


Doveva, 


dovelli, 


dovessi, 


dovrei. 


The compound tenses of the Conditional 


are the 


following. 











Egli avrehbe volulo sposare 

mia sorella. 
lo avrei polulo chiamarlo. 

Voi avresle dovulo venire. 



He would have married my 

sister. 
I could or might have called 

him 
You ought or should have 

come. 



— 144 — 

The verb To he, foUoYcd by an Infinitive, is expres- 
sed by dovere: as, lo devo parlare al Re, I am to speak 
to the King — Voi avreste dovuto pranzare qui, You 
were to have dined here. 

The English auxiliary To have, preceded by the 
verb to will, is only expressed by volere: as, Volete 
tin' arancia? Will you have un orange? — Che avreste 
voluto fare? What would you have done? 

A6REEia£I7T OF THB VERB WITH THE SUBJECT. 

A Verb agrees with its Nominative in number and 
person: as, Mio fratello legge e scrive, My brother reads 
and writes — Le vostre sorelle sono compite, esse cantano 
e hallano bene, Your sisters are accomplished, they sing 
and dance well. 

When there is more than one Nominative either in 
the singular or plural number, the Verb is to be put in 
the plural: as, Giovanni, Pietro e Giacomo sono ricchi, 
John, Peter and James are rich. 

But if the several Nominatives are of different per- 
sons, the Verb is then put in the first or second person 
plural. In the first, if one or more of the Nominatives 
should be of the first person; in the second, if one or 
more of them should be of the second person and the 

[ rest be of the third: this being the established order of 

'\^all Languages. 

EXAMPLES. 

Carlo ed io siamo fratelU. Charles and 1 are brothers. 

Noi ed it padre siamo infelici. Our father and we are un- 
happy. 

Tu e Cesare non siete buoni Thou and Csesar are good for 

da nulla. nothing. 

Voi e le voslre sorelle siete di You and your sisters are good 

huon cuore. • hearted. ^ 



■^.<- 



— 143 - 

When the Nominative is a collective noun as esercitOf 
army — folia, crowd — plebe, mob etc. the Verb is gen- 
erally put in the singular: as, L' assemblea ha esaminato 
la queslione ed ha mandato la risposta al Re, The as- 
sembly has examined the question and has sent its 
answer to the king. 

INDZCATIVE laOOD. 

The present denotes that a thing is actually passing, 
that is to say, is either existing or doing: as, lo amOf 
I love — Eg lino parlano, They speak. 

A progressive or continued act, expressed in English 
by the verb To be and participle in ing, is expressed 
in Italian by the verbs Andare or Stare with the Ge- 
rund. If the act implies motion, the former is properly 
used, if not, the latter. 



e:xa.impl.es. 



I am writing. 

He is looking for. 

She was sleeping. 

We were hunting. 

They will be looking for her. 



lo sto scrivendo. 
Egli va ccrcando, 
Ella stava dormendo, 
Noi andavamo cacciando. 
Essi andranno cercandola. 



The imperfect expresses a past action with respect 
to the present moment of speaking, but implies a con- 
tinuance of action at the time spoken of. 

Ella entrava al momenta che She came in at the moment 

voi uscivate. you were going out. 

Noi leggevamo un giorno per We were reading one day for 

dilello... amusement... 

„ The preterite marks that a thing took place at a time 
completely past. 

13 



— 146 — 



E:Xili»PL.ES. 



Quella paura le cagiono la That fear occasio^i^d her death. 

morle. 
leri vidi voslro zio. I saw your uncle yesterday. 

As there are two tenses in the Italian Language to 
express a past action, and but one in English, in order 
to assist the scholar in the manner of using them, we 
propose the following rule. 

Whenever the verb can be changed into was with 
the Gerund, or the sense expressed by used with the 
Infinitive, without altering its meaning, it is to be put 
in the imperfect tense: as. She waited [was waiting or 
used to wait ) for him every day at your sister's, Ella 
lo aspettava ogni giorno da vostra sorella. 

When considering past moral qualities of persons, or 
properties of things, as if still existing at the time spoken 
of, the imperfect also is used: as, Cesar e era clemenfe, 
Caesar was merciful — But when their present non exis- 
tence is referred to, the preterite must be used: as, Ce- 
sar e fu clemente, Caesar was merciful. 

NB. The compound present signifies an action done 
at an indeterminate time, or within a period not finished: 
as, L'ho veduto oggi, questo mese, quest' anno, I have 
seen him to-day, this month, this year. 

The compound past tenses of the Indicative Mood 
are generally used with the compound of the Imperfect, 
but when the following conjunctions, suhito che, as soon 
as — come, as — appena che, hardly — quando, when — ■ 
dopo che, after, precede them, they are always used with 
the compound preterite and never wilh the compound 
imperfect. 



J 



147 — 



EXAMPLES. 



She had already spoken to Essa gli aveva gid parlato. 

him. 

After she had spoken to him. Dopo che gli ebbe parlato. 

They had arrived at Milan. Erano arrival! a Milano. 

When they had arrived at Quando farono arrivati a Mi- 

Milan. lano. 

NB, It is common in English for a verb referring 
(o a future time, to be in the present or compound pre- 
sent tense, preceded generally by the conjunction se, or 
by any of the above-mentioned, but in Italian it is put 
in the fiitare tense simple or compound. 

EXil.lMPL.ES. 

If he speaks of it I will answer Se egli ne parlera gli rispon- 

him. dero. 

As soon as she comes we will Subilo che verrA glielo di- 

tell it her. remo. 

After they have given the or- Dopo che mi avranno dato Vor- 

der to me I will pay you. dine vi pagherb. 

The Italians generally use the compound future with 
the adverb forse, perhaps, and with verbs denoting uncer- 
tainty, as Sperare, To hope — Credere, To believe etc. 
whilst the English make use of the compound pre- 
sent: as, Perhaps he has not done it, Forse non lo avra 
fatto — I hope she has told it to them , Spero che lo avra 
detto loro. 

NB. The Infinitive Mood is used in Italian with a 
negative, (but never without) instead of the second per- 
son singular of the Imperative: as, Non amare: Non 
leggere: Non udire, Do not (thou) love: Do not read: Do 
not hear. But with the auxiliary Verbs Avere and Es- 
sere, we may use either the Imperative or the Infinitive: 



— 148 — 

as, Non abbi sospetto, or non aver sospello, Do not be 
suspicious — Non sii curioso, or non esser curiosoy Do 
not be inquisitive. 

Your mother, your sisters and I are going to the thea- 

andare 
tre to-night — When he knows that they have arrived, he 

sapere essere 

will be looking for them through the whole city — Perhaps 

per 
she has not finished writing to one of her friends — When 

terminare {Inf.) 
you return we will go there together, and after we have 

rilornare 
spoken to him, we will think what we have to do — Miss 

dovere = 
Hoppner was to have dined at my (step mother's) — When 

da malrigna 

I was at Vienna I went three times a week to Court, where I 

— voUa dove 

received particular marks of attention — The most celebra- 

segno officiosild 
ted temple at Rome was built by Augustus after the battle 

faboricare Auguslo 
of Philippi — The memory of Adrian was surprising — Will 
Filippi Adriano 

you have some tea? — Do not be ( thou ) proud for so trifling a 

le orgoglioso frivolo 

thing — I hope she has spoken to him as he deserved — I 

merilare 
saw your sister yesterday who was gathering flowers in my 

cogliere 

(1) The pupil must put the verbs in thuir proper tenses, as the Infinitives 
only are given. 



- 149 - 

brother in law's garden— The master will come as soon as 

he has given a lesson to Miss Woolmer — I always assisted 

= — assislere 

him under every circumstance, and sometimes also lent 

in preslare 

him money, therefore if he remembers my kindness, he 
[Dat.) perd ricordarsi {Gen.) ycnlilezza {pi.) 

2 3 I 2 

will not speak ill of me (any more) —They had been (free from) 

piu senza 

3 

pride (before that time), but as soon as they had obtained 

fm allora 
the inheritance, they became very haughty — I called upon 

alliero passare da 
her to-day and found that she was reading Tasso. 



LESSOiN XV. 

SUBJUKCTIVC MOOD. 

It is to be observed that absolute, or determinate 
propositions cannot be rendered by the Subjunctive 
Mood, the Indicative being used, whenever the principal 
proposition expresses a positive thing, as the following 
verbs denote: Sapere or Conoscere, To know — Com- 
prendere, To understand — Narrare, To relate — D/re, To 
tell, and other verbs expressing a thing which is beyond 
a doubt: as, I know she is at home, So ch' ella e in casa. 

Hence it will be clearly seen, that when the verb 
of the principal proposition is accompanied by a nega- 
tive particle, or expresses command, entreaty, will, hope, 
fear, consent, doubt, opinion, wonder, surprise, desire, 
permission, prohibition, impediment, displeasure etc. the 



- loO — 

existence in short of an object involving desire, either ne- 
gatively or afprmatively , the dependant verb must then 
be placed in the Subjunctive Mood , when the subjects of 
both verbs refer to different persons; as, I wish, I intreal 
etc. that he should go, Bramo, prego etc. che egli vada. 

NB. If the subject of both verbs is the same, the 
second must be in the Infinitive Mood: as, Le dispiace di 
dirglielo, She is sorry to tell it him. 

The tense of the verb in the Subjunctive ought al- 
ways to conform to that of the preceding verb. Should 
the first verb be in the present or future tense of the 
Indicative Mood, the second must invariably be in the 
present of the Subjunctive, simple or compound. 

Essa br.ama ch' egli riesca in She wishes he may succeed in 

quclVaffare. that affair. 

Temo che voslra sorella abbia I am afraid your sister did 

fatto male a parlar low. wrong in speaking to them. 

Voslra madre duhilerd forse Your mother will perhaps 

ch'io nan sia un galanluo- doubt my being an honest 

mo. man. 

Sometimes when the first verb is in the present of 
the Indicative, it requires the imperfect of the Subjunc- 
tive, that is when the second verb refers to a time 
past: as, I think she dined at Mrs. Lawrel's, Credo che 
pranzasse dalla Signora Lawrel. But, not to deviate from 
the general rule, we may also use the compound of the 
present of the Subjunctive, and say. Credo che abbia 
pranzato dalla Signora Lawrel. 

If however the first verb should be in the Imperfect 
or Preterite of the Indicative, or in the Conditional, the 
second is then always put in the Imperfect of the Sub- 
junctive, simple or compound. 



131 



Ex./knrijjsis. 



11 padre lemeva die suo fylia- The father was afraid his 

slro scoprisse il secreto. step-son would discover the 

secret. 

La sorella dubito che il marilo The sister doubted her hus- 

fosse giunto. band had arrived. 

Egll amerebbe ch' essa if o as col- He would be glad she should 

tasse. lislen to him. 

When the first verb is a Gerund, the second verb 
must be either in the Present or the Imperfect of the 
Subjunctive. In the present, if the subsequent verb be 
in a present tense; in the imperfect, if the subsequent 
verb be in a past or in the conditional. 

Believing she is right, I will Credendo che abbia ragione, 

follow her advice, seguiro il suo consiglio. 

Believing she was right, I Credendo che aYesse ragione , 

followed her advice. seguii il suo consiglio. 

The Subjunctive is required also after Impersonal 
verbs expressing an idea of necessity or convenience: as, 
Bisognare, To be needful — Bastare, To suffice — Con- 
venire, To be proper — Giovare, To be useful — Occor- 
rere, To be necessary: as, Bisogna, basta, conviene, giova, 
occorre ch' egli sia prudente, It is needful, it suffices, it 
is proper, it is useful, it is necessary for him to be pru- 
dent. . 

The verb Essere, To be, in the third person singular, 
followed either by one of the following adjectives or by 
the nouns tempo and or a, time: as also by the adverbs 
meglio, better, and bene good, admits the following verb 
in the Subjunctive. 



152 



Essere facile To be easy 



» difficile » 

» possibile » 

» impossibile » 

» giusto » 

» ingiusto » 

» decente » 

» indecenie » 



difficult 

possible 

impossible 

just 

unjust 

decent 

improper 



Essere espediente To be expedieat 
» sorprendente » surprising 
» necessario » necessary 



» probabile 

» tempo 

» ora 

» rneglio 

» 6ene 



» probable 

» lime 

» belter 

» good 



EXitMPLiES. 



j& facile die Pietro lo faccia. 
Era impossibile ehe io venissi. 

Sard necessario che noi com- 
pariamo al Tribunate. 

tl tempo che cib succeda. 

Sard bene che ne parii libera- 
mente. 

Sarebbe slalo necessario che it 
servo fosse arrivato. 



It is easy for Peter lo do it. 
It was impossible for me lo 

come. 
It will be necessary for us lo 

appear before the Tribunal. 
It is time it should succeed. 
It will be good for him to 

speak freely of it. 
It would have been necessary 

that the servant should have 

arrived. 



It is the property of the Italian Language to inva- 
riably use the Subjunctive after the verbs Par ere or 
Sembrare, To seem — Credere, To think — Gludicare, 
To judge — Supporre , To suppose — Non sapere , Not 
lo know. 



EXAMPLES. 



Io non so chi voi siate. I do not know who you are. 

Non credo ch' essa ottenga cid I do not think she will obtain 

da lui. that from him. 

Pare, or sembra ch' ei sia reo. It seems he is guilty. 

The English verb 3Iust, not being impersonal, may 
take any noun or pronoun for its Nominative, but as 
the Italian verb Bisognare is always impersonal, a change 
of construction becomes necessary, and this is done by 



— 133 — 

adding the conjunction che after bisogna, and transporting 
the subject or nominative of the English verb Must to 
the following one, which is then put in the Subjunctive 
Mood. 

I must go. Bisogna che io vada. 

Thou must believe it. Bisogna che iu lo creda. 

Peter must be just. Bisogna che Pielro sia giusto. 

We must give her a reward. Bisogna che noi le diamo una 

ricompensa. 
You must promise her that. Bisogna che voi le promettiate 

cid. 
The sisters must be at Rome Bisogna che le sorelle siano a 
in a few days. Roma fra pochi giorni. 

The verb that follows a relative superlative with the ^ 
conjunction che should also be put in the Subjunctive | 
Mood: as, Voi siete la piu avventurata donna che sia al j 
mondo, You are the happiest woman in the world — Egli 
e it miglior sarto ch' io conosca. He is the best tailor I 
know. 

Chi, Alcuno, Nessuno, Veruno, Niuno, Nulla, Niente, 
followed by a relative pronoun in a phrase of negation, 
condition, doubt or desire, require the second verb of 
the sentence to be in the Subjunctive Mood. ^^ 

Ella non conohhe nessuno che She did not know any one who 

volesse venire. would come. 

Nulla v'e che lo persuada. There is nothing that will per- 

suade him. 

Chicchessia, Checchessia or Checche followed by cAe 
require the following verb to be in the Subjunctive 
Mood: as, Di chicchessia che parliate, Of whomsoever 

you may speak. -^ 



- 154 — 

Who, Whom, Which, That when carrying with 
Ihem an idea oi condition, require the Subjunctive Mood: 
as, Take a person who is used to it, Prendete una per- 
sona che ne sia pratica. 

However and Whatever translated by per , as we 
4 have seen in the indefinite pronouns, require the Subjunc- 
tive: as. However rich you may be, Per ricco che siate, 
I For those Conjunctions which govern the Subjunc- 

tive Mood, we refer to that part of speech. 



^^* 



aaaaoisQ is. 



I think my sister is gone to the governor's who 

{Abl] 

3 

(according to) my opinion is the most upright man that I 

secondo 

3 1 2 1 . 

know in France — My mother always wished that her sons 
should be religious and studious — I wondered how he could 

che 

1 4 

deceive that honest man — It was necessary that he who was 

2 3 

the cause of so many wrongs to my friend, should be punish- 

danno 
ed — My father must finish that work before the return 

opera prima del 
of the king, it will therefore be necessary for him to find 

pero trovare 

some one to help him in such an undertaking — I do not 

aiutare impresa 

think she will come — He flatters himself (he will gain) his 

lusingare di vincere la 

cause, but he has not yet found an advocate who will 
lite per anchc volere 



I 



— 151) - 

defend it, so that however rich he may be, I do not 
palrocinare cbsi die 
think he can succeed in it — I will never permit my pu- 

riuscire 
pils to neglect their tasks — It is probable that he will 

Irascurare dovere 

come before the time appointed — I am afraid it is. late, I 

prefisso tardi 

must be at my sister's at eight o'clock precisely — It would 

[Ahl) 
be unjust that my son should sufifer that punishment, and I 

pena 
do not think there is any body who could say otherwise 

potere al contrario 

— Where do you imagine Caesar is now? I think he is now 
in France — It is time that he should go to church , and he 
will do well to take his little sister there— It seems that they 

condurre 
preserved their friendship unaltered through every change 

inlallo ad variar 

of fortune — Mrs. Bowyer wished that she had bought that 

picture, believing it was an original. 



LESSON XVL 

XMFXKITIVC MOOD. 

The Infinitive is that Mood which affirms indetermin- 
ately, without either number or person. 

Some Verbs govern a following verb in the Infinitive 
Mood without a preposition; after other verbs, a prepo- 
sition is required with the Infinitive. 

Infinitives following or depending upon Dovere, To 



— lo6 — 

be incumbent — Fare, To do — Potere^ To be able — 
Bisognare, To need — Volere, To be willing — Vedere, 
To see — Vdire, To hear — Sentire, To feel, and similar 
Verbs, as Mir are , To behold — Guardare, To look — 
Ascoltare , To listen — In tender e, To understand — 
Sembrare, To seem etc. take no preposition. 

Ei pud farlo. He can do it. 

Lo vediamo venire. We see him coming. 

Dehho parlarvi. I ought to speak to you. 

They do not require one after Lasciare when it means 
To allow, To permit, but when it signifies To leave off^ 
they take the preposition di: as, Lasciatemi dire le mie 
ragioni, Allow me to give my opinion — Ella non lascio 
di rider e iulto il giorno, She did not leave off laughing 
all day long. 

They do not require one after Super e when it means 
To he able, To be skilled, To know how: as, Ei sa par- 
lare a tempo, He knows how to speak in time. But 5a- 
pere, To know— Credere, To believe — Conoscere, To 
know — Dire, To tell — Narrare, To relate — Provare, 
To approve — Afflrmare, To affirm — Negare, To deny, 
take di. 

Ella sa di non esser rea. She knows that she is not 

culpable. 
Negarono di averglielo dello. They denied that they had 

told it to her. 
II Doll. Stevenson ci disse d'es- Dr. Stevenson told us that he 

servi slalo. had been there. 

Credo d'aver ragione. I believe I am right. 

An Infinitive with a verb expressing an affection of 



157 



the mind: as, Desiderare,To desire — Piacere, To please 
— Godere, To enjoy — Sperare, To hope — Temere, 
To fear — Rincrescere, To regret — Vergognarsi, To be 
ashamed etc. takes di before it: as, Desidero di compia- 
cerci, I desire to obh'ge you — Ella si vergogno di ri- 
prenderlo, She was ashamed to reproach him. 
Infinitives after the following verbs take di. 



To acknow- 


Riconoscere 


To glory in 


Gloriarsi 


ledge 




— happen 


Accadere 


~ admonish 


Ammonire 


— hinder 


Impedire 


— agree 


Convenire 


— imagine 


Immaginarsi 


— appear 


Parere 


— intend 


Intendere 


— ask 


Chiedere 


— judge 


Giudicare 


— avoid 


Evilare 


— meditate 


Medilare 


— beckon 


Accennare 


— menace 


Minacciare 


bid 


Imporre 


— mind 


Guardarsi 


— care 


Curarsi 


— permit 


Permetlere 


— cease 


Cessare 


— presume 


Presumere 


— choose 


Scegliere 


— pretend 


Prelendere 


— command 


Comandare 


— prohibit 


Proibire 


— conclude 


Conchiudere 


— propose 


Proporre 


— dare 


Osare 


— recollect 


Sovvenirsi 


— deign 


Degnarsi 


— refrain 


Aslenersi 


— dissuade 


Scons igliare 


— reproach 


Rlnfacciare 


— doubt 


Duhilare 


— remember 


Ricordarsi 


— endeavour 


Procurare 


— repent 


Penlirsi 


fail 


Mancare 


— reprove 


Rlmproverare 


— favour 


Favorire 


— show 


Moslrare 


— feign 


Fingere 


— strive 


Ingegnarsi 


— flatter one's 
self 


1 Lusingarsi 


— sustain 

— thank 


Soslenere 
Ringraziare 


— finish 


Finire 


-try 


Tenlare 


-fix 


Fissare 


— warn 


Ammonire 


— forget 

— grant 


Dimeniicarsi 
i Accordare, 
) Concedere 


— wager, 
-bet 


Scommellcre. 



u 



158 - 



After Verbs of motion, whether real, as Andare, To 
go — Venire, To come, or figurative, as Eccitare, To 
excite — Adescare, To entice — Animare, To animate — 
Indurre, To induce, InOnitives take the preposition a. 

Essa venne ieri a vedermi. She came to see me yester- 
day. 

Pietro andrd dimani a farle Peter will go and pay her a 

visila. visit to-morrow. 

Voi non la indurrele a fare You will not induce her to do 

una lale cosa. such a thing. 

Essi gli eccilano sempre a dir They always excite them to 

male di lei. speak ill of her. 



To this rule may be added. 



To accustom 


Avvezzare 


— aid 


Aiutare 


— aim at 


Tendere 


— apply one's 
self 


AppUcarsi 


— aspire 


Aspirare 


— assist 


Assislere 


— begin 


Cominciare 


— condemn 


Condannare 


— consent 


Acconsenlire 



To constrain Coslringere 

— delay Indugiare 

— facilitate Agevolare 

— labour hard Stentare 

-put one's K^^,^^^^. 

self \ 

— succeed Riuscire 

— teach Insegnare. 



After other Verbs InOnitives take indifferently dior a. 



To advise 
be accus- 
tomed 

exhort 
oblige 



Consigliare 

Esser soUlo 

Esortare 
Obbligare 



To offer one's i ^ ^ . . 
self i ^^'"''' 

— persuade Persuadere 

— supplicate SuppUcare 

— think Pensare. 




— 139 



EXAMPLES. 



vi esorlo a, or di non dir- I exhort you not to tell it to 

glielo him or to her. 

La supplied a, or di volergli He supplicated her to grant 

accordare il permesso. him permission. 

,^ NB. When the English particle to, before an Infini- 

' live means in order to, it must be expressed by per: as, 

, I will do it to content her, Lo faro per contentarla — 

^^ He will write to her to assure her of the truth, Le 

scriverd per accertarla della veritd. 

Avere and Dare require da or a before the next In- 
finitive: as, Eglino hanno rnolto da fare, They have a 
great deal to do — Datemi qualche cosa da mangiare, 
Give me some thing to eat. 

It is one of the most characteristic properties of the 
Italian Language to use a verb in the Infinitive Mood, 
having the nature of a Substantive, in every case with 
the definite masculine article prefixed, either alone or 
united with an adjective, adverb etc. 



/ 



EXAniPL.ES. 



Nelle sollecUudini delle leggi e The well being of every mor- 
il ben vivere d' ogni morlale. tal consists in the protection 

of the laws. 
11 comune favellare degli uo- The ordinary conversation of 

mini e sempre.... men is always.... 

II suo parlar mi piace si, che... Her speaking pleases me so, 

that... 

The masculine definite article is also elegantly used 
with the Infinitive, when it is preceded by the verb To 
be, impersonally used, united to an adjective : as. It is as 
easy to say it, as it is difficult to do it, Eyli c facile il 
dirlo, c/uanlo difficile il farlo. 



— 160 



The Infinitive Mood with a preposition is generally 
used in Itahan, whilst the participle present is used in 



English. 



EXAMPLiES. 



Dopo averse parlato fa conlen- After having spoken lo her he 

lissimo. was delighted. 

Ei le passo dappresso senza He passed close to her without 

guardarfa. looking at her. 

^^rentrar in Firenze s'ahhat- On entering Florence they 

terono nel Signor James. met Mr. James. 

An Infinitive, governed by the preposition da, com- 
monly takes a passive sense. 

La virtu e da commendare, or Virtue is lo he commended. 

da commendarsi. 
Cid non e da credere, or da It is not to he believed. 

credersi. 

It is a property of the Italian Language to use the 
Infinitive Mood instead of the third person singular of 
the Present, Imperfect, and compound Preterite of the 
Indicative, as well as of the Subjunctive Mood, depending 
on another preceding verb by means of the conjunction 
che, which is then suppressed, changing the Nominative 
of the second verb into the Accusative of the first. Such 
a construction, being an imitation of the Latin, is fre- 
quently used by our classic Authors. 

EXAMPL.ES. 

Vi converrd aver sernpre nella It behoves you to remember 
memoria Idddio essere stato that God was the Creator of 
Creatore del Cielo, e delta heaven and earth. 
terra (that is che Iddio e 
stato...] 



— 163 ~ 

Ei consumo luUa la maUina in He spent all the morning in 

cercarli, looking for them. 

Nel vederti ripiglia it lagri- When I see you my grief re- 
war V usala via. sumes its wonted course. 

Egli credelle di salvar it figlio He thought to save his son by 

col negar d' essergli padre. denying that he was his 

father. 

The Gerunds of the auxiliary verbs Avere and Essere 
are often elegantly omitted, and the participles belonging 
to them used alone, agreeing with the Accusative, \^ Ave- 
re, and with the Nominative, if Essere: as, Giunto il 
familiare a Genova, e date le lettere, e fatta Vamhasciata, 
fu dalla donna con gran festa ricevuto ( that is essendo 
giunto. . . . avendo date. . . . avendo fatta.) The servant 
having arrived at Genoa and having delivered the letters 
and given the message, was received by the lady with 
great joy. 

The Gerund governs words dependent on it like any 
other inflexions of the verb from which it is derived. 

FARTIGXPLB. 

There are two Participles, the present and the past. 

fARTXGIFI.S FRESEMT. 

It is formed by changing the terminations of the 
Inflnitives are, ere, ire into ante, ente, iente: as, From 
Am-are, To love: amante, loving — From Tem-ere, To 
fear: temente, fearing — From Sent-ire, To feel: sen- 
tiente, feeling. As may be seen, it is but a simple adjective, 
consequently it must agree in gender and number with 
its substantive: as, Vn womo obbligante, An obliging 
man — La religione dominante, The established religion 
— Quadri parlanti, Speaking portraits. 



FAnTICIPI.E PAST. 

The Participle past of a verb having Avere for its 
auxiliary, is either used absolutely, or agrees with the 
Accusative connected with it. 

When we express an action which takes its origin 
from the subject or Nominative of the proposition, the 
participle is unvaried: as. Ho fabbricato una casa, I 
have built a house. This example, as may. be seen, 
represents simply an idea of an action done at a past 
time. 

But when we express an idea independent of the 
Subject or Nominative, that may be said to be inherent 
to the Object or Accusative, and with such an idea we 
indicate the state in which such a person or thing is 
found, the participle, being then considered as a mere 
adjective, agrees in gender and number with the Accu- 
sative: as, Superbiaj invidia, avarizia, sono le tre faville 
c* hanno i cuori accesi. Pride, envy, avarice are the 
three sparks which inflamed their hearts (1). 

It is absolute when it is followed by an Infinitive, 
whatever may be the gender and number of the Accu- 
sative: as, Le cose che io gid aveva ndiio dire. The things 
which I had already heard spoken. 

But when Avere is preceded by one of the following 
conjunctive personal pronouns, viz. mi, ti, ci, vi, lo or 
ily li or gli, la, le, ne in the Accusative case, the parti- 



(1) This rule is somewhat difRcull to be comprehended by those who 
have not much experience in our language; for this reason, in order to facil- 
itate the manner of using the participle past , we propose the following rule. 

The participle past, when it precedes the Accusative, remains unchanged, 
but when it follows the Accusative , it must agree with that Accusative in 
gender and number. Ex. Ho venduto alciini libri , ma non quelli che ho com- 
prati da Paolo, I have sold some books, but not those I have boitghl from Pdul, 



— 161 — 

Se egli crede la Repubblica If he thinks thai il is ncces- 

aver bisogno che i Senalori sary for the Republic that 

parlino libera etc. (that is the Senators should speak 

che la Repubblica abbia bi- freely etc. 

sogno. ) 

I 3 2 

To set a fallen enemy free, the Italians never 
dare (Dal.) liber td unquemai 

5 12 

demanded (so enormous) a ransom (as to) ruin him — It 

tale da 

would be proper to tell her your opinion, to accustom 

conveniente {Dat.) 

her in time to listen to the truth — If you assist me in 

per = aiulare 

finishing this work I will reward you as you deserve — 

ricompensare 
Your brother might work much more to assist his poor 

polrebhe 
father, and he will repent not having done it — John's uncle 
came this morning to pay me a visit and persuaded me to 

2 I 

induce his nephew to (give up) gambling — I have long 

abbandonare gioco da gran tempo 

ceased to reproach your brother-in-law, for he always 

perche 
denies that he is the cause of the misfortunes which have 

disgrazia essere 

befallen my family — To know how to compose verses like 

{Dal.) come 

your brother, is a talent few persons possess — The judge 

wished to impose silence upon my son, but he would not 

[DaL) voile 

leave ofT giving his reasons — That person is enticing you 

dire 
to swerve from the path of honour, but it is the only way 

deviare senliero via 

14* 



— 102 — 

to merit the esteem of every body — He came to me to 

procacciarsi. da 

take leave, and I had much difficulty to dissuade him from 

comjedo dislorre 

going to Home this month — Miss Pearson hoped to have 

seen him without his being able to recognize her — That 

riconoscere 

2 I 

friend of your's is to be feared, for he only tries to excite 
his partisans to avenge themselves — Your poor mother 

pariigiano vcndicare 
strives to maintain her family honorably, but she has not 
the means of obtaining suflTicient for the wants of each day. 
avere assai hisogno 



LESSON XVll. 

GEEUND AND PARTXGIPX.E. 
GERUND. 

It is used absolutely having reference to some subject 
or Nominative preceding : as, // soldato, combattendo 
con coraggio, merita d' esser promosso, The soldier, 
fighting with courage, deserves to be promoted. 

It serves sometimes to separate the words of relation 
between one proposition and another: as, 11 padre, ve- 
dendo il figlio in pericolo, si mosse a soccorrerlo^ The 
father, seeing his son in danger, ran to his assistance. 

The Infinitive with (he prepositions uz and con, either 
alone or in conjunction with their articles, has the force 
of the Gerund. 



1 



— 16o — 



ciplc past must agree in every instance in gender and 
number with it. 



EXADIPIiES. 



Egli mi ha veduto (mas.) or He has seen me. 

veduta (fern.) 

Quando gli ebbe uccisi. When he had killed Ihem. 

Le abbiamo inlese canlarc. We have heard them sing. 

The participle of a verb conjugated with Essere for 
its auxiliary, always agrees with its Nominative: as 
Ella e slimata da tutti , She is esteemed by all — Essi 
sono caduli nelle mani del Tiranno , They have fallen 
into the Tyrant's hands. 

An English participle in the Accusative case governed 
by a verb, is rendered in Italian either by the Infinitive 
Mood, or by a tense of the Indicative with the conjunction 
che: as, I hear him singing^ Lo sento cantare, or Sento 
che canta. 

The verb To make, when reflective, is always used 
in English with the participle past after it, but in Ital- 
ian it requires the Infinitive Mood. 

EXAMPLES. 

She makes herself haled by Essa si fa odiare da tuUi. 

every body. 
They have made themselves Essi si sono falli rispettare 
respected even by their ene- anche dai loro nemici. 
mies. 

By an idiom of our Language, conjunctions such as 
Subito, Appena, Quando etc. are frequently suppressed 
before a compound tense, and the phrase then is to be 
commenced by the participle. 



i66 



EXAMPI.ES. 



Pailato che ehbe. When he had spoken. 

Finita che fu la guerra. After the war was finished. 

Cominciato che sard il lavoro. As soon as the work shall he 

commenced. 

Seeing your daughter run so fast, I thought that some 

forle 
misfortune had befallen you, where have you sent her? I 

essere [Dal.) 

havesent her to call the physician, because my wife has 

chiamare medico 

been il! all night — Do you know John's sisters? No, but I 
hear them playing the piano all day — Having met 

suonare piano forle 
him, you might have told him that his wife had come to 

polevale essere 

bring me the letter that I had asked him for — Miss 

[Dal.) — 
Barrington in twenty six lessons has made sufficient pro- 

haslanle 
gress in Italian to make herself understood— That Lady 

comprendere 
whom Mr. Leslie has seen depart, was the same who made 

use of those talents, which nature has given her — I have 
uso [Dal.) 

travelled this year in Italy, where I have had an opportunity 
viaggiare = occadone 

of seeing several master-pieces of antiquity, and where I 

capo-d'opera 
have made a collection of the most valuable pictures and 

pregevole 



— 167 — 

statues — The Misses Home (are very sorry) to iiear that 

[Dal.) — moUo displace 

your sisters are gone without leaving word with any one 

parlire detlo [Dal.) 

that they were gone to Rome — It is certain that they have 
not committed the crimes of which they have heen accu- 

delillo 
sed — He, remembering the injuries he had sustained, 

[Gen.) soffrire 

would not grant her the assistence she demanded of 
volere {Dat.) aiulo chiedere [Dal.) 

him — When the power of the nobles was overcome, and 

polenza domare 

when the war with Spain was ended, he had no other 

Spagna finire 

enemy to fear — Having arrived in Engtand, I found that 
the return of the Queen from France had rejoiced the 

rallegrare 
hearts of all. 



LESSOM XVI IL 

OF TH£ PASSIVE 

It is to be observed that every transitive active Verb 
may become passive by changing i(s Nominative case 
into the Ablative, and its Accusative into the Nomina- 
tive. Instead therefore of saying: The prince makes 
laws, // principe fa le leggi, we may say: Laws are 
made by the prince, Le leggi sono fatte, or vengono 
fatle, or si fanno dal principe. 

It follows from this example that the passive tense 
can be expressed in Italian in three ways. 



— 108 — 

1*^ By Ihe verb Essere, To be, to which is united 
llie participle past of every active Verb : as, Troja fu 
distrutta dai Greci, Troy teas destroyed by the Greeks. 

2*^. By the same participle past and the verb Venire, 
but only in its simple and never in its compound tenses: 
as, Troja venne distrutta dai Greci, Troy was destroyed 
by the Greeks. If we should say : Troy has been 
destroyed by the Greeks, it ought to be rendered, Troja 
e stata distrutta dai Greci, and not e venuta distrutta 
dai Greci. 
f 3*1. By the particle si, united simply to the verb 
' active, that is to say , that the verb active must be 
rendered in the same tense, in which the auxiliary verb 
To he is found in EngHsh: as, Troja si distrusse dai 
Greci, Troy was destroyed by the Greeks. This latter 
applies only to the third person of both numbers. 

In some instances, but more rarely, the simple tenses 
of Andare are employed in the same manner: as, Egli 
\ andava soggetto alia podagra , He was subject to the 
gout. 

The agent of a passive verb is governed by da, dai, 
dallo, dalla: dai, dagli, dalle: as, // Signor Sullivan e 
rispeltato da lei , e dagli amici del Signor Parker, 
Mr. Sullivan is respected by her, and hy Mr. Parker's 
friends. 

To avoid any confusion between da and con, either 
alone or in conjunction with their articles , which in 
English are both translated by the preposition hy; we 
inform the pupil that da means hy, from; and con, hy 
the means of. In the sense last mentioned, when hy is 
preQxed to a Gerund, it may be expressed either 
by con, col, collo with the Infinitive, or by the 
Gerund alone. When hy means through, it is expressed 
by -per. 



f 




— 169 — 



EXAMPLiES. 



Le reciproche concessioni fu- Reciprocal concessions were 

rono falle e dal Monarca e made bolli by the Monarch 

da' suoi suddili. and bis subjects. 

Essa oltenne quel favore con She obtained that favour by 

preghiere. prayers. 

I nemici avevano oUenulo quel The enemies had gained those 

privilegj colla conquisla. privileges by conquest. 

L' intellelto della giovenlu si The mind of youth is formed 

forma col leggere, or leg- by reading good books. 

gendo buoni libri. 

Andarono a Roma passando They went to Rome passing 

per Perugia. by Perugia. 

One, people, they, we, employed indefinitively as Nom- 
inatives to an active or intransitive Verb, are rendered 
in Italian by the particle si with the verb in the third 
person singular, if there is no Accusative. 

One believes, people, they believe — Si crede. 
One says, people, they say — Si dice. 

One sleeps, people, they sleep — Si dorme. 

If in a phrase of this kind there be an Accusative of 
the third person in English, it becomes the Nominative 
in Italian, and the verb conforms to it in number : as, 
One sees a pine-tree. Si vede un pino — One sees four 
pine-trees. Si vedono quatlro pini. 

Should the Accusative be of the first or second per-"^ 
son, as me, thee, us, you, si cannot be used, but either / ^ 
the third person plural of the active, or the Accusative 
becomes the Nominative with the verb in the passive ^ 
tense. 

15 



- 170 



EXi&MPLES. 



They will punish me. Mi puniranno, or sard punito. 

They do nol believe you. Non vi credono, or non stele 

credulo. 
They do not esteem us. Non ci slimanOf or non sidmo 

slimali. 

I When me ne, ie we, ce ne, ve ne occur in similar 

I phrases, the verb is used in the passive tense, in order 

\ to avoid the inconvenient junction of si, or with the 

v^ plural in the active. 

EX AMPERES. 

They will speak to you of it. Ve ne sai^d parlato, or ve ne 

parlei'anno. 
They will give us one pound Ce ne sard data una libbra, or 
of it, ce ne daranno una lihhra. 

When the verb is reflected one, 'people , they, are either 
expressed by uno, ciascuno, allri in the singular, or by 
alcuni in the pluraL 

EXAMPLES. 

One flatters one's self. Uuo, ciascuno or altri si lu- 

■ singa. 
They flatter themselves. Alcuni si lusingano. 

^^ All JVerbs having si joined to them are conjugated 
^ with Essere in their compound tenses: as, Si e parlato 
di voi, They have spoken of you, But in these cases we 
may suppress si and add the participle past stato and 
say, E stato parlato di voi, They have spoken of you — 
Si sono dette molte cose di lei, or Sono state delte molte 
cose di lei, They have said many things of her. 

It is said: It is believed — It was said: It was believed, 



— 171 — 

and similar expressions are to be rendered in the same 
manner, SiAice : Si crede — Si diceva : Si credeva. 

The expressions / am told — I am forbidden — I am \ 
allowed — / am ordered — / am robbed — / am asked — 
/ am promised, and some others, are used in ItaUan after 
the following rule. 

The Nominative with these Verbs becomes the Da- V 
live in Italian, and we say instead of 1 am toldj It is 
told to me, and so on. 

She was promised to go there. Le fu promesso di andarvi. 

The father is told that etc. Al padre vien deilo che etc. 

You will not be allowed. Non vi verrd, or sard concesso. 

Soldiers are forbidden to go Ai sodati e proibilo di uscire 

out after the retreat. dopo la rilirala. 

The Romans cultivated their land either by slaves 
purchased from the barbarians, and forced by corporal 
comprare 
punishment to labour, or by colonii parliarii , to whom was 

given a small share in the harvest as wages — Your 

porzione [Gen.] salario 

brothers are forbidden to go to the play this evening, but 

commedia 

6 2' 13 4 5 

to morrow they will be allowed to go there — In conversing 

favellare 
we sin in various ways and above all in the subject of con- 

modo soprallullo maleria 

versation which we propose — My father was robbed of his 

[Gen.) = 
2 

watch near the Exchange— As they know you like Madeira 
presso Borsa {Dal.) piacere Madera 



- 172 — 

1 
wine very much, they will send you four bottles of it — 
They have spoken on that subject, when they ought 

{Gen.) 

(to have been silent), and really one cannot be too 

aver taciuto nel vero 

i 
careful not to exceed in words — For their courage and 
guardarsi eccedere 

intrepidity, they have been promised a large reward — 

ampio 
"When we sincerely repent of our faults, we deserve par- 

colpa = 
don — They say he will be elected a member of Parliament 
—I have been spoken to in favour of that poor old man — 

a pro 
Ugolino sought only to strengthen his own despotism by 

— assodare 

depriving all the magistrates of power, and by intimidating 

intimorire 
the archbishop Roger. 
Ruggeri 



LESSON XIX. 

VEBBS TAKING DIFFBaSNT AUXXLXARXBS. 

Active Verbs are conjugated in the compound tenses 
with Avere: as, Egli The sempre amata, He has always 
loved her. 

Reflective and Impersonal Verbs take Essere : as, Mi 
sono pentito, I have repented — £ piovuto tutta la nolle, 
It has rained all night. 



— 473 — 

Intransitive Verbs of motion (1) take Essere: as, Ellaf 
6 caduta nel fiume, She has fallen into the river — Essi\ 
sono andati in Francia, They are gone to France. \ 

All transitive and intransitive verbs, united with the A 
particle si, are conjugated with Essere in their compound I 
tenses: as, Cato killed himself, Catone si e ucciso: and 
this applies also to the corresponding particles mi, ti,. 
ci, vL It is to be observed however, that when me, te, 
siy noi, voi, are used instead of the above, the transitive 
verb must then have the auxiliary Avere: as, Cato has 
killed himself, Catone ha ucciso se. The former however 
is to be preferred. 

The intransitive verb Vivere, To live — Correre, To 
rxm — Fuggire, To flee, joined to a noun without a pre- 
position, take the auxiliary Avere, 

EXAIUPLiES. 

He has lived for a short time. Egli ha vissuto pochi anni. 

You have run through all Eu- Voi avele corso tuUa VEuropa. 
rope. 

She has fled from every dan- Essa ha fuggito ogni pericolo, 
ger. 

The verb Essere is used when the noun is preceded 
by- a preposition, which is understood in the above 
examples: as, EgliQ vissuto per pochi anni — Voi siete 
corso per tutta VEuropa — Essa e fuggita da ogni peri- 
colo. Hence, whenever any intransitive verb governs an 
Accusative, it requires Avere, because it then becomes 
active. 

The Verbs Volere, Dovere and Poiere which from j 
their nature require the auxiliary Avere, can change it 



(I) Camminare , Passeggiare, To walk — BallarCj To dance, and some 
others, are excepled and take Avere in tbeir compound tenses. 

15* 



174 - 



into Essere, when they are united with a Verb which 
in its compound tenses takes the auxiliary Essere: as, 
Non ho volulo, or non sono voluto andare, I did not wish 



to go etc. 





mTMNSITIVE VERBS 






Cou^u^altd m\"\\ aveke. 




Cenare 


To sup 


Piangere 


To weep 


Dormire 


— sleep 


Pranzare 


— dine 


Giocare 


— play 


Ridere 


— laugh 


Gridare 


— cry out 


Sospirare 


— sigh 


Parlare 


— speak 


Starnutire 


— sneeze 


Pensare 


— think 


Tossire 


— cough 


Peccare 


— sin 


Viaggiare 


— travel 



INTRANSITIVE AND IMPERSONAL VERBS 



ZNTRA17SXTXVE. 



Accadere 


To happen 


Convenire 


To be proper, 


Addivenire 


— fall out 




to agree 


Andare 


-go 


Divenire | 


— become 


Apparire 


— appear 


Diventare \ 




Appartenere 


— belong 


Dispiacere 


— displease 


Arrivare 


— arrive 


Entrare 


— enter 


Avvenire 


— come, to 


Giacere 


— lie down 




pass 


Illanguidire 


— languish 


Bastare 


— sufj^ce 


Importare 


— concern 


Cadere 


-fall 


Nascere 


— be born^ to 


Calere 


— care 




spring 


Comparire 


— appear be- 


Parere 


— seem 




fore the 


Partire 


— depart 




judge 


Perire 


— perish 



173 - 



Piacere 


To please 


Restare 


— stay 


Rimanere 


— remain 


Rincrescere 


— be sorry 


Ristare 


— stop 


Ritornare 


— return 


Ri venire 


— come again 


Riuscire 


— succeed 


Scadere 


— devolve 



Scalurire 

Sopravenire j 

Sorvenire ) 

Sparire 

Stare 

Svanire 

Svenire 

Uscire 

Yenire 



To spring , 
issue 



to 



— come upon 

— disappear 

— slay 
—- vanish 

— faint 

— go out 

— come 



XXaFEBSONAX.. 



Aggiornare 

Aggiornarsi 

Annoltare 

Annottarsi 

Bisognare 



To be day light 

— grow dark 

— be necessary 



Didiacciare 
Dighiacciare 



T'o thaw 



LampeffgiareJ ,. ,. 
Folgorare ) 
Piovigginare — drizzle 



INTRAIVSITIVE AND IMPERSOMl VERBS 

Cou^u^aled m\\\ \)o\\\ essere tvud avehe. 



XNTRAKSITIVB. 



AfFondare 


To sink 


Correre 


— run 


Crescere 


— grow , to 




bring up 


Fuggire 


— shun , to 




flee 


Guarire 


— cure, to re- 




cover 


Morire 


— die, to kill 


Pascere 


— feed 


Passare 


— pass 


Pervenire 


— attain 


Risolvere 


— resolve 



Salire 


Togo up, to 




arrive at 


Scendere 


— descend 


Seguire 


— follow, to 




happen 


Smontare 


— alight, to go 




down 


Sopravvivere 


— survive 


Sortire 


— make a sal- 




ly, to elect 


Spicciare 


- issue, to 




gush out 


Valere 


— be worth 


Yivere 


~ live 



176 



IiaPERSON&I.. 



Balenare To lighten 

Diacciare / 

^ , . . — freeze 

Ghiacciare \ 

Grandinare — hail 

Nevicare — snow 



Piovere 
Spruzzolare 
Tuonare 
Tonare 



To rain 

— drizzle 

— thunder 



Mr. Lewis walked with me the whole day , and forgot 
-^ scordarsi 

that I had not dined: it snowed so much that my cold 

ianto raffreddore 

became worse, and I coughed and sneezed all night — I 

[Adj.) 
alighted from my horse at my sister's, who invited me 

= {Abl) 

to dinner, but I could not stay, because I wished to return 

pranzo 
home, where a friend of mine had resolved to wait for 
a casa aspellare = 

me — As soon as she saw her lover, she fainted in his arms, 

Bene 
and her brother, thinking she was dead, became insane — 
Those books never belonged to Peter's sister, but to my cou- 
sin — His speech has displeased the Parliament, and I am 

(Dat.) 
sure he will never succeed, if he speaks in that manner — 

modo 
My mother has always brought up and protected her like a 
daughter — He who has lived a comfortable and voluptuous 

agialo molle 



(1) In the following Exercise •when the verb in English is found in a 
simple preterite, the pupil is requested to translate it in the compouud 
present; as, I saw , Ho vcdtilo. 



— 177 — 



1 3 



life is but Itttle prepared to lead a hard and painful 

non che condurte slentalo 

one — That youth has almost arrived at the high degree 

grado 
of glory, to which his grandfather attained — I have not 
gone out, because it rained, is raining, and perhaps mil 
rain all day — I believe it thundered last night — Have you 

2 15 

seen the postman? No, he has not yet passed — Do not 

porlalettere 
believe that man, he has always fed every one with vain 

{Dal.) {Gen.) 

hopes — The English last month sank some French frigates 

2 1 

and four (line-of-battle ships) — Daylight having appeared, I 

vascelli di linea giorno = farsi 

passed the bridge and continued my journey. 

viaggio. 



LESSON XX. 

VERBS GOVERIVIIVG DIFFERENT CASES. 

\e,Y\)s a\wti\\8 c\o\5m\mq V\\c- geivitivc:, wWUx^cy case. 



To abound in Abbondare 

— account for Render ragione 

— beacquaint- i , . 

... Informarst 

eawilh \ 

— adorn wilh, i . ^ 

, Adornare 

— be alarmed i 



To be angry j ^^^^^.^^^. 
with \ 



be armed 
wilh 

■ be asham- 
ed lo, for 



Armarsi 



Vergognarsi 



-be bathed j ^^^^^ ^ 
wilh \ *^ 



- 178 — 



I'o blush aty to 

— care for 

— be charged ) 
with \ 

— be content ) 
with \ 

— be covered i 
wiih \ 

— be charmed i 
wilh^ at \ 

— be crowned j 
wilh ) 

— delight in 

— be displeas- i 
ed wilh ] 

— be discon- j 

certed at \ 

— enjoy, to be j 
glad ot i 

— be enraged j 

at \ 

— fall in love ) 
wUh \ 

— feed upon , ) 
wilh \ 

— fill wilh 

— forget j 

— furnish with 

— glory in 

— glow with 

— invest wilh 

— laugh at 

— live upon 

— mix tvilh 

— murmur at 

— be occupied i 
with i 



Arrossire 
Curarsi 
Esser accusato 
Incaricarsi 

Conlentarsi 
Coprirsi 
Esser rapilo 

Esser coronalo 

Compiacersi 
Esser malcon- 

tento 
Esser sconcer- 

tato 

Godere 

Irrilarsi 

Invaghirsi 

Nutrirsi 

Empire 

Scordarsi 

Dimenticarsi 

Fornire 

Gloriarsi 

Animarsi 

Investire 

Ridersi 

Pascersi 

Mescolare 

Lagnarsi 

Occuparsi 



To be offended 
at 

— pant wilh 

— part wilh 

— perceive 

— be piqued 
at 

— be pleased 
wilh 

— pretend 

— pride one's 

self upon 

— profit by 
~ be provided 

wilh 

— recollect 

— rejoice in 

— remember 

— repent 

— be reveng- , 
ed on ' 

— reward wif/i 

— be satisfied 
wilh 

— seize on 

— be scanda- 

lized at 

— be sorry /or 

— spread wilh 

— strive for 

— be surpris- 
ed at 

— thank for ^ 

wilh 

— be trans- 
ported wilh 

— tremble at, 
with, for 



Offendersi 

Palpilare 

Disfarsi 

Accorgersi 

j Offendersi 

j Esser contento 
Pretenders 

j Gloriarsi 
Appropltarsi 

j Provvedersi 

Sovvenirsi 
Rallegrarsi 
Rammenlarsi 
Penlirsi 

Vendicarsi 

Ricompensare 

Conlentarsi 

Impadronirsi 
Scandalizzar- 

si 
Esser dispia- 

cenle 
Spargere 
Ingegnarsi 

[ Esser sorpreso 
) Ringraziare 
[ Esser rapito 




Tremare 



179 



Totriumph in, \ j-rionfafe 

over ) 

— trust to, in Fidarsi 



To want 

— weep at 

— woncler at 



Aver bisogno 
Piangere 

Maravigliarsi 



To be pleased and to be displeased may be rendered 
also by piacere and dispiacere. The Nominative with 
these Verbs becomes the Dative in Italian, and nouns, 
with the preposition with prefixed to them , are to be 
put in the Nominative case: consequently, 1 was very 
much pleased with the ball last nighty is to be rendered 
by, The ball pleased me very much last night, II ballo 
mi piacque moltissimo ieri sera — I am excessively dis- 
pleased with his insolent manner, // suo modo insolente 
mi dispiace estremamente, 

"YeVbs a\\x)a\^s QO\im\\u^ VUe, dative , 
\xi\\a\e,\ie,'V cast ov i^xe-i^osUVou \\\e^ c^o\)tm w E»u^\\sU. 



To associate / 
with \ 

— attend on. 

— answer 

— be busied m 

— comply with 

— be concern- j 

ed i 

— gratify 

— hurt 

— inspect 

— join m, with 

— mind 

— oppose 

— please 

— provide for 



Associarsi 

AUendere 
Rispondere 
Occuparsi 
Conformarsi 

Inter essar si 

Jggradire 

Nuocere 

Vegliare 

Unirsi 

Badare 

Opporsi 

Piacere 

Provvedere 



To reflect on 

— renounce 

— resemble 

— resist 

— resolve 
upon, on 

— smile upon 

— succeed in 

— survive 

— outlive 

— take a de- 

light or 

pleasure 

in 

— think of 



Rifleltere 
Rinunciare 
Rassomigliare 
Resisiere 

[ Risolversi 

Sorridere 
\ Succedere, 
\ Riuscire 



i 



Sopravvivere 

Prender pia- 
cere 

Pensare 



Pensare followed by a noun takes the Dative: as, 
Egli pensa a lei continuamente, He continually thinks 



— 180 — 

of her — When it precedes a Verb in the Infinitive Mood, 
it then requires the preposition di: as, Penso di andarvi^ 
I think of going there. 

« 

aud \\\e, ACCUSATIVE o^ S\\i TuimGr, 

To ask one for a thing Chiedere una cosa ad uno 

— conceal a thing from one Nascondere 

— confer a thing on one Confcrire 

— do one a thing Fare ....... 

— envy one a thing Invidiare 

— forgive one a thing Perdonare . . . . . . . 

— give one a thing Dare 

— hide a thing from one Tacere 

— impose a thing on one Imporre 

— lend one a thing Preslare 

— order one a thing Ordinare 

— owe one a thing Dovere ....... 

— present one with a thing Presentare 

— promise one a thing Promettere 

— rob , to steal a thing 

from one Ruhare 

— reproach one for a thing Rimproverare 

— take away a thing from 

one Porfar via 

— teach one a thing Insegnare 

— tell one a thing Dire 

— withold a thing from one Ricusare 

T\it ^oUowiut^ QO\)tYu d'l^e-YtuY cases oy i^y^i^osxVxous. 



To admit of Ammeltere 


Ace. 


— attend upon, <o Allendere 


Dat. or Ace. 


— be born of Nascere 


Gen. or Abl. 


— call at , upon Passare 


Abl. 


~ call for Chiedere 


Ace. 



181 



To confide in 

— congratulate one 

upon 

— consist ofj in 

— depend on, upon 

— dispense with 

— be displeased at 

— be dressed in 

— enter upon, into 

— fall in with, to 

meet with 

— flee from 

— fire at 

— be fond of 

— go out from , of 

— guard one's self 

against 

— hear from 

— hear of 

— hinder from 

— inquire into, 

after, for 
~ listen to 

— look aty on 

— look for, after 

— obey 

— participate in 

— persevere in 

— be pleased at 

— rebel against 

— be surrounded 

with 

— satisfy 

— be seized with 

— take leave of 

— taste of 



Fidarsi 
Felicitar una 



I 



Consistere 

Dipendere 

Dlspensare 

Non trovar piacere 

Vestirsi 

Enlrare 

Incontrarsi, abhat- 

tersi 
Fuggire 

Far fuoco 

Amar con passione 
Uscire 

Guardarsi 

Ricever nolizie 

Inlendcre 

Impedire 

Ricercare 

Ascoltare 

Guardare, osservare 
Cercare 
Obbcdire 
Parlicipare 
Perseverare 
Trovar piacere 
Ribellarsi 

Esser circondato 

Soddisfare 
Esser preso 
V render congcdo 
Gusiarc 



Gen. or Dat. 

Gen. 

Prep, in 

Abl. 

Abl. 

Dat. or Prep, in 

Gen. 

Prep, in 

Prep.m; Incontrare 

Ace. 

Dat. Ace. or Abl. 

Prep, sopra or ad- 

dosso 
Ace. 
Gen. or Abl. 

Abl. 

Abl. 
Ace. 
Gen. or Abl. 

Ace. 

Ace. 

Dat. or Ace. 

Ace. 

Dat. or Ace. 

Dat. Gen. 

Prep, in 

Dat. or Prep, in 

Dat. or Abl. 

Abl. 

Dat. or Ace. 
Abl. 
Abl. 

Gen. or Ace. 
IG 



To be threatened 
with 

— wait for 

— intermeddle 

with 

— interpose be- 

tween 



— 182 — 

Esser minacciato 

Aspeltare 

Frammeltersi 

Inframmellersi 

Inlrammettersi 

Trammetlersi 



Abl. 

Ace. 

Take fra or tra gen- 
erally, and in 
sometimes 



r Observe that verbs compounded of a preposition 
\ .prefixed, have generally that same preposition repeated 



<, 



for the government of a noun connected with them. 



EXAMPEiES. 



Addurre ad un luogo 
Congralularsi con uno 
lucorrere in un pericolo 
Frammeltersi fra due rivali 



To convey to a place. 
To congratulate one. 
To run into danger. 
To interpose between two ri- 
vals. 






The preposition however, though frequently em- 
ployed as above, is far from being invariably so, an 
exception often arising from the case being regulated 
solely by the primitive verb, the government of which 
supersedes that of its annexed preposition: as, Dipendo 
da voif I depend upon you. 

. QaaaoaQQ 20. 



When I think of the ingratitude of my cousin, I am 
always ashamed to meet with him; it is however necessary 
for me to forgive him his faults and not to oppose the will 
of God — I cannot recollect what he said to me — Your sons 
deceived me, but they will repent it — I preceived in time 

a 
that he intended meeting my uncle — I know you have for- 
aver I'intenzione [Inf.] 



— J83 — 

given your enemies, and I am glad of it — My son saw her 
at ray aunt's, and immediately fell in love with her, but I 
da di trallo 

know she laughs at him — If that man does not desist from 
intermeddling with other people's business, he will soon 

afjare {pi.) 
repent it — You do not know how to profit by the advice of 

consiglio 
your uncle, neither do you think of your own interest, nor of 

ne ne 

that of your sons — Trust to him and do not mind any one 
else — The success of the undertaking depends upon that 

successo impresa 

man who lives upon the misfortunes of others, and who would 

disgrazia 
not blush to gratify his avarice (at the expense) of honour. 

a spese 

aaQaQuaa 21. 

He seems to be very much occupied with the charge 

impiego 
that is entrusted to him — She reflected a few moments and 

then resolved upon disclosing the truth - I thank you for the 

scoprire 
kindness you have shewn my son: you confer a favour on 

{Dat.) 
him by the promise of your protection — As we know that 
your brother is very fond of hunting, we will call at his house 
to-morrow, in order that he may join our parly — The phy- 

compagnia me- 

sician has ordered my sister a tepid bath every other day, 

dfeo liepido 

and he has promised her some rides in the summer 

cavalcala cstivo 

months — - At this moment she went out of the room, and he 



— 185 — 

reproached her for it — They prided themselves upon their 
knowledge and experience, and would not profit by the 
sapere 

i i 

advice of those who wished them well; therefore their con- 

volere bene 

duct admits of no excuse — It is true he was sorry for Iheir 
loss, but not surprised at the cause — He rejoiced in having 
a friend whose courage and virtue triumphed over every dif- 
ficulty — They persevered so unceasingly intheirenlreaties, 

incessanlemenle suppUca 

that at last he complied with their request, but now he is 

dimavda 
threatened with the seizure of his property. 

sequestra 



LESSON XXI. 

ADVSBB 

An adverb is a word that qualifies the meaning of 
a verb, an adjective, or another adverb with regard to 
manner, place or time. 

Many Italian adverbs are formed from adjectives by 
adding mente to them, as in English by adding ly: as, 
From prudente, prudent: prudentemenle , prudently. 

If an adjective ends in le or in re, preceded by a 
vowel, the final e is cut off when mente is annexed: 
as. Facile, easy: facilmente, easily — Particolare , partic- 
ular: par ticolar mente, particularly. 

When adjectives have a different termination for 
each gender, the feminine termination is adopted in form- 
ing the adverb: as. From savio (mas.) savia (fem. 
wise: saviamente, wisely. 



— 183 - 

Adverbs may be formed in the superlative degree 
by changing the last vowel of the adjective positive into 
issimamente: as, From onesto, honest: onestissimamente , 
very or most honestly. 

Should the adjective end in io, io is changed into 
issimamente : as, From savio , wise: savissimamente : 
very or most wisely. 

Adjectives ending in co and go that take an h in the 
plural, require it also before issimamente: as. From 
ricco, rich: ricchissimamente very or most richly. 

The following adverbial superlatives are irregular, 
viz. Bene, well: benissimo, very well — Poco, little: 
pochissimo, very little — Spesso, often, has both spessis- 
simo, and spessissimamente, very often. 

Observe that poco, pochissimo — spesso , spessissimo 
are used adjectively as well as adverbially. 

Sometimes the simple adjective in the masculine 
gender only, without mente, is used for an adverb, as Pe- 
trarch says. 

Non sa come amor sana e come No one knows how love heals 

ancide, and how it slays, 

Chi non sa come dolce ella so- Who does not know how sofl- 

spira, ly she sighs, 

E come dolce parla, e dolce And how sweetly she speaks, 

ride. Sind how sivcelly she smiles. 



ADVEEBS AHD ADVEEBXAI. EXPRESSIONS. 



Abbasso Below 

Abbas tan z a / ^ , 

. „ . Enough 
A sumcienza \ 

A bella posta With a design 

A bello studio On purpose 



A bocca I By word of 

A voce 

A caso 

Per av Ventura 

A capriccio Capriciously 



By word 
mouth 

. By chance 



iG* 



186 



Adagio 


Slowly, gently 


Ad alta voce 


Aloud 


Addietro 


Formerly 


Adesso 


Now 


A destra 


On, or to the 




right 


A dispetto 


Out of contempt 


Afifatto 


Quite 


Aff6 


Faith, upon my 




faith 


A fondo 


Thoroughly 


AllaFrancese 


After the French 


airinglese. 


English 


airitaliana, 


Italian, Spanish 


alia Spagnuo- 


manner, or fa- 


la etc. 


shion 


Alia stordita 


At random 


AU'opposto 


On the contrary 


AUora 


Then 


Almeno 


At least 


Al piu 


At most 


Alquanto 


Somewhat 


Alirimenti 


Otherwise 


Altrove 


Elsewhere 


A lungo 


For a long time 


A mano destra Ontherighthand 


A mano sinistra On the left hand 


A mia, tua etc. 


According to my 


fantasia 


thy etc. fancy 


A mio, tuo, suo 


Against my, thy 


malgrado 


his will 


A muta a muta 


L By turns 


Anche 


Yet 


Ancora 


Also, likewise 


Anzi 


Rather, on the 




contrary 


Anzi che no 


Rather 


Appresso 


Afterwards 



Appunto Just so 

A piedi On foot 

A posta On purpose - 

Apocoapoco By little artd 
liltle 



A proposito 

Assai 

Assai volte 

A sinistra 

Avanti 

A vicenda 

Bel bello 

Ben bene 

Bene 

Cioe 

Circa 

Coia 

Costa 

Cosli 

Come 

Cosi cosi 

Cosi 

Da burla 

Da parte 



In lime s^ 

Much, very 

Many limes 

On, or to the left 

Forward 

In turns ^. 

Softly y 

Entirely J 

Well 

That is 

Nearly 

There 



As, how, like 
So so 
So 

In jest 
Aside 

Dappertutto Every where 
Davvero In earnest 

Da vicino Near 
DaU'altro can- On the other 

to hand 

Dal canto mio, In my, thy, 
tuo, suo, no- his, our etc. 
stro etc. turn 

Del pari Likewise 

Del tutto Entirely 

Dentro Within 

l>ihuon3iYOg\iaiWillingly 
Di buon' ora Betimes 
D'l f route Abreast 



187 — 



I 



Di gran lunga 

Dila 

Dimalavoglia 

Dinanzi 

Di nuovo 

Di piu 

Di presente 

Di qua 

Di quando in i 
quando \ 

Di soppiatto 

Dietro 

Dirimpetto 

Domani 

Donde 

Dopo dimani 

Dove 

Egualmente 

Eziandio 

Forse 
s^ Fra breve 
^ Fra poco 
,^ Frattanto 

Finalmente 
,^ Finora 

Fuor di pro- 
"^ posito 

Fuori 

Gia j 

Giammai 
Giu 

II piu delle | 
volte i 

Indielro 

Indi j 

In fuori 



By far 

Thence, Ihilher 
Unwillingly 
Before 
Again 
Besides 
Immediately 
Hence, hilher 

Note and then 

Secretly 

Behind 

Opposite 

To-morrow 

Whence 

After to-morrow 

Where 

Equally, alike 

Also, even 

Perhaps 

Shortly 

In a short lime, 

In the mean time 

Finally 

Till noto 

' Improperly 

Without, out 
Already, now 
Formerly, indeed 

Never 

Below, down 
Most times 

Backwards 
Thence, after, 

then 
Outwards 



Inoltre 
Intanto 



Intorno 
In qualche ) 

parte ) 
In questo i 

mentre \ 
Insieme 
Ivi 



leri I'altro 

leri 

Laggiu 

Lassii 

Lontano ) 

Lungi \ 

Mai sempre 

Mai 

Male 

Mai volen- 

tieri 
Mentre 

Mica 

Molto 
Nemmeno 
Neppure 
Niente aflfatto 
No j 

Non i 

Oggi 
Ognora 
Or j 

Ora i 

Or ora 

Ora... ora 



Besides 

In the mean 

while 
About 

Somewhere 

Just now 

Together 

There 

The day before 

yesterday 
Yesterday 
There below 
There above 

Far 

For ever 

Never 

Not well,wrong 

Unwillingly 

reluctantly 
While 
(Only with a 

negative) not 

at all 
Much 

Not even 

Nothing at all 

No, not 

To-day 
Always 

Now 

Just now 
Sometimes.... 
sometimes 



J 



J 



188 - 



Orgoglio- i 
samente ) 


Proudly 


Quassu 
Quinci 


Here above ^ 
Hence 


Ove 


Where 


Quindi 


Thence , after 


Palesemente 


Openly 


Qui vicino 


Just by 


Passo passo } ^ 

T , Step by step 

Lemmelemrae^ r ;/ r 


Quivi 
Rare volte 


There 

Seldom 


Peggio 


Worse 


Sempre 


Always 


Per sempre 


For ever 


Si 


Yes, so 


Per tempo 


Early 


Siccome 


As 


Per lo piu 


At most 


Solamente 




Piano 


Softly 


Solo 


Only 


Pian piano 


Very softly 


Soltanto 




Piuttosto 
Piu presto 


Rather 
Sooner 


Sopra 1 
Su \ 


Up, above 


Piu volte 


Several times 


Sotto 


Under 


Poi 1 
Poscia \ 


Then 


Spesso 
Spesse volte 


j Often 


Pressoche 


Almost 


Subito 


Immediately 


wv 


\ As near as pos- 


Talora 


Sometimes 


Pressoapoco 


1 L 

\ sible 


Tardi 


Late 


Presto 


Quickly, soon 


Tempo fa 


Once 


Prima 


Before 


Teste 


Just now 


Punto 


At all 


Tosto 


Soon 


Qua 1 


Here 


Troppo 


Too much 


Qui i 


Tuttavia 


Slill 


Quaggiii 


Here below 


Ultimamente 


Lately, at last 


Qualche volta Sometimes 


Unicamente 


Only 


Quasi 


Almost 


Yolentieri 


Willimjly 



When rather precedes an adjective or participle past, 
it is expressed by anzi che no, and the adjective may 
be placed between anzi and che no: as, They are rather 
modest. Esse sono anzi modeste che no. 

Gid is sometimes used as an expletive for the sake 
of emphasis, when it is generally equivalent to indeed: 
as , Non gia ch' egli lo creda. . . . Not indeed that he be- 
lieves it. _ 



— 189 — 

Mai and Giammai in answering a question mean 
never. When they are used with a verb, they require a 
negative before them. In conditional or doubtful phrases 
they mean ever, 

EXAMPLES. 

Avele veduto il Signor Ward? Have you seen Mr. Ward? 

Mai. Never. 

Non vado mai da lui. I never go to his house. 

Se mai lo vedele, dilegli.... If ever you see him tell him... 

No is employed, as a negative, placed in a detached 
manner at the beginning or end of a phrase. In other 
cases non is used, as. No, son io, iVb, it is I — Non mi 
place, It does not please me. 

After the verbs Dire^ Rispondere, Credere, Sper are etc. 
no and si take di: as, Ei disse di si ed essa rispose di 
no, He said yes and she answered no. 

If the personal pronoun lo follows non, they are con- 
tracted in one word : as instead of Non lo vedo, we say 
Nolvedo, I do not see him — Nol voglio, I do not wish 
it. This mode of expression is never used before a vowel, 
s impura, and z. 

Si is used instead of cosi: as, II giudice rimase si 
convinto, che non pote condannarlo, The judge remained 
so convinced that he could not condemn him. 

Care must be taken not to confound the two adverbs 
Allora and Dunque. The former means at (hat time, the 
latter consequently. 

EXAMPIiES. 

Comando che fosse fallo morire He ordered him to })e cruci- 
in croce, siccome allora si fied as it was then the cus- 
usava. torn. 

Che farete voi dunque? What will you do then? 



■J 






-. 11)0 — 

Punto and mica strengthen the phrase : as, Ella we 
allora ne poi it ccnobbe punto, She did not know him at 
all either then or since — Son novelle vere non son mica' 
favole, The news is true aud by no means a fable. 

Sometimes the adverb with the masculine article 
prefixed has the force of the noun: as, II dove— II 
quando — // come — II si — // no — // perche etc. and 
sometimes even without the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

E domandaio da lei del perche And being asked by her about 
e del come. the reason and manner ( of 

the why and the how ). 

Che si e no nel capo mi ten- That yes and no contend in 
zona. my head. 

ALdA5e,Y\)s deuoViu^ locolxV'^ \\\ a mawuv cotycsi^ou(jIxu^ m\\% 
S\\<i S\\ni classes o\ A-emouslYaVwc i^yououus. . 

FmsT Class. Second Class. Tkibd Class. 

Where one speaks Where the person Dislanl 

or writes. is spoken to. from both. 

'^"'' \ Here I ^"^l' ! There Y' ""l ! There 
i>ua f ] Costa ] La, cola \ 

Some Grammarians are of opinion that the adverbs 
of place qui, costi, li convey a more limited meaning 
than qua, costd, Id, that the former should be used in 
speaking of a house, village, town, etc. and the latter of 
a province kingdom etc. but this distinction is not 
attended to in common conversation. 



— 191 — 

She always does every thing capriciously, and now and 
then she is sorry to have acted wrong: I asked her, against 

fare 
my will, if she desired me to accompany her, and she 

volere accompagnare 

answered me proudly no — Did you see my son? No, where 
is he then? — Last night robbers came (to my house) and 

da me 
as soon as I heard a noise, I cried out a who is there?)) 

= forte 

and afterwards I reluctantly got up and looked every where, 

alzarsi 
but they were already gone — You never say any thing 

fuggire 
to your son, but let me tell you he is rather proud, and 

permetlere 
always speaks badly of every one— I know your sisters read 

2 I 2 2 

aloud by turns every evening, on the contrary mine seldom 

I 
have a book in their hands -— The dinner is already prepar- 
ed, but they are not yet arrived; I think they delay on 

rilardare 
purpose, probably, in order not to meet that man, who 
(in my opinion) is the most insupportable person I ever 

secondo me 
saw — Why did you not call upon us the day before yest- 
erday? Because we were then in the country, and are only 

2 1 

just now returned— Mr. Reynolds comes to see us semetimes 

in the morning and sometimes in the evening — You must 

go instantly. Where? The time and place you will learn 

quando dove saperc 



{ a 2 



shortly, in the mean time prepare to depart — We dine 

prepararsi 

after the English and dress after the Italian fashion — She 

1 I 

is rather shy, I found that out by chance. 
acerbetlo scoprire lo 



LESSON XXII. 

FBBFOSXTI OX9. 

A preposition is an indeclinable word which has the 
power of carrying the meaning of the part of speech to 
which it is joined, and serves also to connect words 
with one another. 

We have treated of the prepositions Con, In, Per, 
Su, when we spoke of the article: we shall now lay 
down particular rules for the use of Da and Per. 

Da is used like by to signify instrumentality or 
agency: as, Essi vennero feriti da una saetta, They were 
wounded by an arrow — Essa fu lodata da tutti , She 
was praised by every body. 

It is used like from to denote difference or separation 
of any sort: as, Da sera a matiina. From evening to 
morning — Da Londra a Parigi, From London to Pa- 
ris — Essi sono assai diversi da noi, They are very dif- 
ferent from us. 

With numerals it signifies about: as, Noi rimanemmo 
a Londra da tre mesi, We remained in London about 
three months. 

It also expresses an anterior date: as, Da due mesi, 
For these two months past — Da piccolina, Since my 
childhood. 



— 193 — 



It expresses the moral or physical qualities of a per- 
son: as, Vomo da poco, A man good for nothing — Fan- 
ciulla da marito, A girl of a proper age to be married. 

It has the signification of like or as. 



EXAJUPL.ES. 



Egli vive da Signore. He lives like a Lord. 

Noi combaltemmo da eroi We fought like heroes. 

Essa V ama da fralello. She loves him like a brother, 

Voi avele agito da amico. You have acted as a friend. 

Da galanluomo. As I am an honest man. 

When used with Infinitives it signifies expediency or 
necessity; property or duty: as, Ei non e uomo da di- 
sprezzare or da disprezzarsi, He is not a man to be con- 
temned — Essa e piuttosto donna da commendare or da 
commendarsi, She is ralher a Lady to be commended. 

Used Tvith primitive or personal pronouns, it signi- 
fies alone: as, La padrona non vuole che andiate da voi, 
The mistress does not wish you to go alone — Moite 
malatlie guariscono da se, Many maladies get well by 
themselves. 

This preposition, put before personal pronouns, 
answers to the English with us or in our country : as, 
With us both Italian and Latin are spoken, Da noi si 
parla Italiano, e Latino. Should however the nation be 
mentioned, presso is used: as. With the Romans the 
senatorial order was the most distinguished, Presso i 
Romani V or dine Senatorio era il piu distinto. 

It is used for brevity to signify at, in or to the habi- 
tation of a person: as, Go to my sister's, Andate da mia 
sorella [i): 

(1) If the suLstanlive be without a pronoun, the ablative article is usedj as 
AndFO dal Senatorc (that is, a casa del Scnatore), I shall go to thesenator's, 

17 



— 194 — 

When there is a motion to the habitation, 

To my house \ ^ / Da me, or a casa mia. 

To thy house j [^ [ Da le^ ov a casa tua. 

To his house f ^ i Da lui, or a casa sua. 

To her house ) £ < Da lei, or a casa sua. 

To our house \ x I Da not, or a casa nostra. 





To your house | o I Da voi, or a casa voslra. 

To their house I '^ \ Da loro, or a casa loro (1). 

The motion in such phrases is often not directly 
mentioned, but merely implied; for instance, leripranzo 
da me il Dottore Arnould, Yesterday Dr. Arnould dined 
at my house — Dimani sard da vostro zio, To-morrow 
I shall be at your uncle's. 

When a person's own house is meant in the sense of 
home^ a casa or in casa is used, without the possessive 
pronoun: as, Vado a casa, I am going home — Non e in 
casaf He is not at home. 

PER 

Per is used more especially with Infinitives to signify 
motive, end or object: as, Faro di tutto per compiacervi, 
-^ I will do every thing in order to content you. 

After the Verbs Stare and Essere followed by an 
Infinitive, it means To be on the point of: To be about: 
g To be in danger. 

(1) The mode of signifying to my house, to thy house etc. by da me, 
da te etc. is not to be used on all occasions indiscriminately, for it carries 
wilh it a supposition of the person , or persons mentioned being then in his, 
her, or their house 3 consequently, I am going home, must be expressed by 
Vado a casa, and not Vado da me^ which would convey quite a different 
sense, to wit, / am going somewhere by myself (that is without being 
compelled or conducted). By the same rule, He is not at home, must he 
expressed Ly Non e in casa. 

This mode is employed in those cases, where no ambiguity can arise: 
for instance — Andale da me, e dite al mio servo,... Go to my house, and 
tell my servant..,. 



19S — 



EXAMPLES. 



Ella era per parlire quando.... She was on the point 0/ start- 
ing when.... 
Slava per dirmi, ma.... He was about to tell me, but.... 

Egli slelte per cadere. He was in danger of falling. 

It is used to denote cause: as, Per le continue piogge 
ogni rivo e divenulo un flume, By the continued rains 
every rivulet is become a river — EUa divenne quasi 
mutola per vergogna, She became almost mute with 
shame. 

It is used with nouns to signify space of time or place: 
as, Per un giorno si attribuisca a ciascun Vonore, Let 
the honour be attributed to each for one day — Essi 
passarono per Milano , They passed through or by 
Milan. 

It serves to signify the nature or character of persons 
and things: as, Essendo stato un pessimo uomo in vita^ 
in morte e reputato per Santo, Having been a very bad 
man while living, in death he is reputed a Saint — Qui 
si prende il vizio per la virtu, Here they mistake vice 
for virtue. 

It is used in supplications and adjurations: as, Per 
Vamor del Cielo, For the love of Heaven. 

It is used with various nouns adverbially : as, Per 
accidente, By accident — Per giorno. Daily. 

When placed before a verb or a substantive, it 
answers to the English words However, Whatever: as, 
Whatever power he may have, Per potere che abbia. 

It is used in a distributive sense: as, Essi hanno ri- 
cevuto quattro lire sterline per uno, They have received 
four pounds a piece. 



— 196 



PREPOSITIONS 

^^?^V\\ \W cases iVfvj c^o\)m\.(t) 



AUato 


Near hy^ al the side of, about 


Dat. Gen. 




Addosso 


On, upon one's back, about, at Dat. 




A fronte 


Opposite, over against 


Dat. Gen. 




A guisa 
A modo 


Like 


Gen. 




Anzi 


Before 


Ace. 




Appelto 


Opposite, in comparison to 


Dat. Gen. 




Apple 


At the foot 


Gen. 




Appresso 


With, near, by, next 


Ace. Gen. 


Dat. 


Avanti 


Before, in the presence of 


Dat. Ace. 


Abl. 


Circa 


About, concerning 


Ace. Dat. 


Gen. 


Contra 
Contro 


Against, over against 


Gen. Ace. 


Dat. 


Dentro 


Within 


Dat. Ace. 




Dietro 


Behind 


Dat. Ace. 


G. Abl 


Dlla 


On that side 


Abl. 




Di qua 


On this side \ 




Discosto 


Far 


Abl. Dat. 




Dopo 


After 


Ace. Gen. 


Dat. 


Eccettuato 


Except, but 


Ace. % 




Entro 


Within, in 


Ace. Dat. 




Fino, Sino 


Till, until, as far as, to 


Dat. Ace. 




Fra, Tra 


Within, between, besides, among 


Ace. 




Fuori 


Beside, besides, out, outside 


Gen. AcG. 




Fuorche 


Except 


Ace. 




In mezzo 


In the middle 


Dat. Gen. 


Ace. 


In fuori 


Except, but, excepted 


Abl. 




Intorno 


About, round about 


Dat. 




Lungi 
Lontano 


Far 


Abl. Dat. 






(1) The case first specified , is the one most generally used. 



— 197 — 

Luni^hesso ... . 

_ ^ Aionq, near Ace. --.»,.^>- - 

Lungo ^' ^^ 



Mediante Through^ by means of, for 


Ace. 


OUre, oltra Beyond, besides 


Dat. Ace. 


Prima Before 




■ Gen. 


Presso Near, almost 




Dat. Gen. Ace. 


Quanto, In | . . 

^ \ As, far, as to, 


as 


Dat. 


quanto ' ' ' ' » 






Rasente Close to 




Ace. Dat. 


Rimpetto", i ^ 
Dirimpello 1 ^'""' ''^'"''"< 


opposite 


Dat. 


Salvo Except, but, save 


Ace. 


Secondo According to 




Ace. 


Senza Without 




Ace. Gen. 


Sopra,sovra On, upon, by 




Ace. Gen. Dat. 


Sotto Under 




Ace. Gen. D. Abl. 


Su, Su per Upon, on 




Ace. 


Tranne Except 




Ace. 


Verso Towards, to 




Ace. Gen. 


Vicino Near 




Dat. Gen. 



Infuori is placed after the case it governs : as, Da 
voi infuori, Except you. 

Salvo and Vicino may be declined. 

Perdemmo lullo salvo or salva We lost every thing but life. 

la vita. 

La nave era vicino or vicina The ship was near the har- 

al porto. hour. 

22^2010333 23. 

In consequence of the snow, none of the mails are 

corriere 
arrived except (that one) from Leghorn— Mr. Slater and his 

quello [Gem.) Livorno 

n* 



— 198 — 

family were on the point of leaving this , when they received 

parlire di qui 

4 

a message informing them, that the road was impassa- 

ambasciala avverlire slrada impralica- 

12 3 

ble between Rome and Sienna — In going from Marseilles 
Mle Siena Marsiglia 

to Naples in the Leopold the second, we were at sea about 

slare in 
seven days — They will return towards the end of the month in 
order to go to the baths of Lucca — He was kept in prison 

hagno — ienere 

for ten years. Why? Because he was about to kill the gover- 
nor — In our country we prefer the useful to the ornamental, 

si apparente 

but with the French they sacrifice much to please the ima- 

si 
gination — All speak well of the Misses Reynolds, but Mr. B. 

amongst others praises them very much —The enemy retired 

ritirarsi 
in good order, but left on the field of battle about eight 
thousand men dead and wounded (if I mistake not) — In 

tra se non la sgarro 

speaking of his son, you told me that he was a youth not to 
be despised, but last night at my sister's he sat down by 

assidersi 
my daughter and told her some things, which in prudence 

per 
(cannot be related again): to-day I have met with him, 

non sono da ridirsi 
and I was on the point of telling him some thing to the pur- 
pose — 1 waited for you till two o'clock. Where? At your 
aunt's. I swear as I am an honest man I was there. At 

giurare 
what 'clock? At eleven. You are in the right; at that hour 
I was (taking a walk) by the side of the river. 
passeggiando 



— 199 



LESSOIN XXIII. 



GOKJUNCTXON. 



A Conjunction is a part of speech that is chiefly used 
to connect sentences; so as out of two or more senten- 
ces to make but one: it sometimes connects only words. 



E 


And 







Or, Eilher 




Ovvero, Oppure 


Or, Or else 




Ossia 


Or, 




Non che 


1 Not only, not merely, 
\ not, much less 


not only 


Non.... che 


But, except 




E.... e j 


Both,... and 




Si.... si i 






Non.... se non 


Nothing hut, 




Non.... altro che 


Nothing else but 




Non.... altra cosa che 


Nothing hut 


* 


Pure 






Nondimeno 


However 




Nulladimeno 


Nevertheless 




Non pertanlo 


^ Notwithstanding 




Ci6 non (fstante 


For all that, yet 




Tuttavia 






Con tutto cio 


1 




Ne 


Nor, neither 




Adunque 1 


Then 




Dunque j 


Therefore 




Per conseguenza ' 


Consequently 




Posciache ( 
Poich^ 1 


Since, after 




Giacche 


Since 




Dacche 


Since, from the time 





— 200 — 

Ma But 

Laonde \ 

Percio ( Therefore 

Per la qual cosa i For which reason 

Pertanio / 

Perciocche | 

Perocche [ Because y for 

Perche ' 

Non prima.... che No sooner.... than 

Pero However, therefore 

E and before a vowel take the letter d: as, lo ed 
Antonio , I and Anthony — Jl Signor Grignon od Ella, 
Mr. Grignon or she. 

ISon che in an affirmative sentence, having ma 
expressed or understood for its correlative, signifies hut 
even, hut also. On the contrary, non che in a negative 
sentence strengthens the negation. 

V amore e di tanta potenza Love is of such power that it 

che ha vinlo i fortissimi uo- has conquered not only ten- 

mini non che le tenere der v/omen hut even the 

donne. stoutest men. 

Nulla speranza gli conforta No hope of rest or even of less 

mai non che di posa, ma pain ever comforts them. 
di minor pena. 

Ne, if placed after the verb, requires another negative 
before it: as, lo non istimo ne lei ne suo zio, I esteem 
neither her tior her uncle: but we say. Ne io lo conosco, 
Nor do I know him. 
r Pure, used expletively, gives an elegant emphasis to 

a phrase: when followed by (roppo, it means too well, 
but too well. 



201 — 



EXAMPLiES. 



DUe pure. Say notv 

Andale pure. Do go. 

Essa lo sa pur troppo. She knows it hut loo well. 

Buffalmacco asked how that stone (was called) and Ca- 
— pielra avesse nome 

landrino answered « What have we to do with the name, 

— {Gen.) 

1 5 2 1 

since we know its property » — She said to him I can 

ne virtu 

4 2 S 6 7 3 

neither esteem you nor your friend any more, and he an- 
swered nothing else but « I deserve il » — He saw no other 
possible means to obtain her, but that of (running away) with 
mezzo avere rapire = 

2 I 

her —Why dost thou not answer thou wicked man? — Either 

= reo 
my wife or Emma will come, and if it is agreeable to you, she 

far piacere 
will introduce my friend. I shall be happy to see not only 

aver piacere 
her and your wife, but also your friend — From the time the 

2 I 

sun rose till night, the enemy did nothing but bombard 
spuntare hombardare 

the town — She has undoubtedly committed a grievous fault, 
nevertheless he forgave her — It is true she has always shewn 
an affection for you, but for all that, you must be cautious 

not to trust too much to her, because you would not be the 

a 
first she has deceived — Mrs. Craufurd asked your son if he 



— 202 — 

knew any of the sufferers in the last inundation at Florence, 

danneggiato 
and he answered « but too well » because he had been one 
of them. 



LESSON XXIV. 

CONJUNCTIONS GOVERNING TBB SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Quantunque 

Sebbene 

Benche 

Tuttoch^ 

Ancorche 

Prima che 

Senza che 

Affinche 

CU 

Onde 

Perch^ 

Acciocche 

Se 

Non ostante 

che 
In caso che 



Although 



Before 
Sooner than 
Without 

That 

In order that 

To the end that 

If 
Whether 

Notwithstand- 
ing 
In case that 



Ameno che 

Non che 
Conpattoche 
A condizione 

che 
Per tema che 
Purch6 
Qualora 
Quando 
Dove 
Ove 

Dopo che 
Subito che 
Tosto che 
Finche 
Posto che 
Dato che 



Except 
Unless 
Not that 

On condition 
that 

For fear that 

Provided 

If 
Whenever 

When 

After 

As soon as 

Till, Until 
Supposing 
Put the case 



^ 



When the above conjunctions are found in English 
with the present tense, either of the Indicative, or 
Subjunctive Mood , we invariably make use of the 
present of the Subjunctive: and when they are united 
with a past tense or the Conditional, the Imperfect of 
the Subjunctive is always used. 



- 203 — 



EXAMPLiES. 



Although she lives in that 

mean looking house, she is 

very rich. 
They will stay at Leghorn, 

until Mrs. Lloyd has taken 

twenty sea baths. 
Although he was ill, he would 

continue his journey. 



Quanlunque stia in quella ca- 
succia, essa e ricchissima. 

Resteranno a Livorno, fnche 
la Signora Lloyd dA)hia. pre so 
venli bagni di mare, 

TuUodie fosse malalo , voile 
conlinuare il suo viaggio. 



They could not have reached Non sarebbero poiuli arrivare 
Dublin,unless the wind /lad a Dublino, a meno che il 



changed. 
My niece would dine with 
you, on condition that you 
would accompany her to the 
Opera. 



vento non si fosse cambiato. 
Mia nipole pranzerebbe seco 
voiy con pallo che I' accom- 
pagnaste all' Opera. 



In good authors we find che as a conjunction, un- 
derstood after the words innanzi, avanti, prima and 
after a verb of doubt or fear. 



^ 



EXAMPLES. 

Innanzi si conchiudesse la pace Before the peace should be 

(instead of innanzi che....) concluded. 

Temo mi sia nemico (instead I fear he is my enemy. 

of temo che...) 

KtmaYks ou se. 



Should the verb of the principal proposition be in 
the present or in either of the past tenses of the Indi- 
cative Mood, the verb preceded by se must be in the 
same tense of the same Mood. 



204 - 



EXAMPLES. 



If I have money, I know how Se ho danari, li so spender e. 

to spend it. 

If you had come, I was ready Se venivate, era pronto ad ac- 

to receive you. cogliervi. 

If I went to the Professor's, it Se andai dal Professore, fu per 

teas to reveal a doubt to manifeslargli un dubbio. 

him. 

When the verb of the principal proposition is in the 
future tense, the verb which follows se may be cither 
in the present or the future. In the present, when it 
would express a desire that the thing which was to 
happen, might happen at the moment of speaking: in 
the future, when it expresses futurity. 

EXAMPBjESS. 

I will gladly marry her, if my lo la sposero volentieri, se mio 

father agrees to it. padre vi acconsente. 

If you go into the country, I Se andrete m campagrncf, verro 

will go with you. con voi. 

If the verb governed by se is united in English with 
a conditional tense, the former in Italian is put in the 
Imperfect simple or compound of the Subjunctive, and 
the latter in the Conditional simple or compound as in 
English — We may also translate the simple or com- 
pound Imperfect with the conjunction se by the Gerund. 

If I were rich I would buy a Se fossi ricco comprerei una 

house. casa, or Essendo ricco etc. 

I should have come if I had Sarei venuto se avessi potuto, 

been able. or sarei venuto potendo. 



- 205 — 

When se means whether, it takes indifferently the 
Subjunctive or Indicative: as, Se cio e or sia huonoy If 
that thing is good. 

The three conjunctions Dopo che, Subito che and 
Tosto che take the Indicative: a past tense, when there 
is a subsequent verb that expresses a past action, and 
a future, if the subsequent verb denotes futurity. 

As soon as the king had ar- Subito che il Re fu arrivato, 

rived, a great many gifts moUi doni furono dislri- 

were dislributed. huUi. 

As soon as the king arrives, Subito che il re arrivera, si 

a great many gifts will be distribuiranno moUi doni, 

distributed. 

Although I remembered you and wished to see you 

rivedere 
I 

again, my occupations did not allow me to come — If I had 

known that he was out, I should have spared myself the 

risparmiare 

trouble of going to his house — I should bke you to stay here 

pena aver placer e 

until I have finished writing this letter to Mrs. Arnould —These 

petitions will be presented, as soon as the Queen arrives 

supplica 

24 5 

-- We promised this morning to take some friends of our's 

condurre 

to Fiesole to-morrow, but if the weather does not change 

— cambiarsi 

(for the better), we shall remain at home — For fear his 

in meglio 
repentance was not sincere, she would not trust to much to 
pcnlimento voile 

18 



— 206 - 

him, until he had proved it by his actions — If I spent last 

= fallo {sing.) passare 
winter at Naples, it was in order to benefit my mother's 

giovare 
health — She is at present engaged in a law-suit and provi- 

impegnare Ule 

ded she gains it, has promised to take her niece to Flo- 

vincere 
rence, Rome and Naples — On condition that you accompany 
me to Egypt, I will make the tour you propose, but in order 

in Egillo giro 

that we may have time to visit the diflferent Capitals, we must 

potere Capitale 

(set out) immediately— Supposing Mrs.Hoppner goes to Venice 
parlire Venezia 

this month, she will still have time to return before we leave 
this — I do not know whether your friend is disposed to 
return to London this year , if I meet him to day I will not 
forget to ask him — Although he was the prime minister's 
friend and presented at Court, he could not obtain any thing. 

potere 



LESSON XXV. 



XKTERJEGTXON. 



An Interjection is a word used to express some pas- 
sion or emotion of the mind. 



Ah I 


Ah! oh! 


ha! 


ho! 


Bravo ! 


Bravo, very well 


AMI 


, 






Cosil 


Thus 


Aime! 


1 






Dehl 


Ah pray 


Ahimel , 


> Alas! 






Eh I 


AlaSf hem 


Oim^I 


\ 






Ecco 


LOf behold 


Ohime ! 


1 






Guai 


Woe 


Bene I 


j Well! 






Ohl 


Oh 


Ebbene ! 






Oibo, Via 


Fie 



207 



Ola Ho there, hallo 

Alto Halt, stop 

Orsii \ 

Su I Cheer up 

Via } Up up, courage 

Su su 1 Be firm 

Animo 



Vlva,EvvivaLongfh*ve, huzza 

Piano Gently, softly 

Cheto 

Silenzio 1 Hush, silence 



i 



Zitto 

Lasso ) n 

. , . , , Poor me 
Ahi lasso I 



Lasso is declinable even as an interjection, thus Ahi 
lassa! Ahi lassi! according to the gender and number 
of the persons, from whom the exclamation may pro- 
ceed. 

aaaaQiiQa 26. 

2 1 

Ah pray assuage your anger and pardon me I and having 
lasciare ira 

said so, she began to weep and to repeat alas I poor me I — 
When he saw his tomb, he cried « Oh tomb of the best 

esclamare 
of kings that ever lived I » — Ah would to heaven you had 

essere placer e {Dat.) 

never arrived I — Oh would to God you relied (on those that) 

volere {Ace.) a chi 

love you I — Alas I I have lost all I possessed and I see no- 
thing but misery before me ! — Gently Sir, my master is 

padrone 
asleep. Oh I wanted to speak to him, but I will return — 
Alas I to what do I see that poor old man reduced I to beg a 
piece of bread — Up, up, my dear fellow, it is late. Weill it is 

amico 

4 1 i 

seven o 'clock. Oh oh I seven o *clock I Then what o* clock 

a 
is it? It is eleven o 'clock. Ah poor me 1 1 ought to have been 

at the General 's at eight o 'clock , how unfortunate I am! 



208 - 



aiQQaci>[i\?o[La^(Da7 ai3.Ba©Q3a 






a 



Education, and the leisure which gives time for reflec- 

comodild 
tion, are two conditions equally necessary to man, in order 
to attain the complete development of his understanding, 

(Dat.) 
and the knowledge of what would constitute the happiness 

{Dat.) 
of all, if ever he should arrive at the administration of pub- 
lic affairs — The king of S. has sent for Mr. B. a clever 

far chiamare {Ace.) valenle 

engineer, to construct a new rail-road; he has promised 

slrada fcrraia 
him fifty one pounds a month: Mr. A. is to follow Mr. B. 

lira slerlina 
but I do not know when, as travelling over mountains cov- 
ered with snow is dangerous — Mrs. Monsell told Mr. James 
that her daughter and not his sister was allowed to go to 
Mrs. Boothby's ball, the latter showed the former a 
fesla di ballo 
note, which he had until then concealed from her; at 
biglieUo 

2 I 

this moment Mrs. Barrington came in (o ask Mr, James for 
Tasso, and having heard the subject of their conversation, 

5 t 2 

she congratulated them upon both having been invited — 
According, to the taste of several travellers, the Apollo is the 
most beautiful statue in the Vatican, it pleases them much 

Vaiicano 
more than the Venus of the Medici at Florence — It is said 
that a month ago the little town of N. was taken by the 
enemy, and that all the inhabitants were put to the sword; 

a {il di spada 
but it is not known whether it is true or not, let us hope that 
the whole is a fable - Her having spoken to them about it 
so late, prevented their going to see him before they set 



— 209 - 

out; but although they did not believe she was capable of 
saying what was not true, yet, less to satisfy themselves 
than others, they, as soon as they returned, called upon his 
parents - Miss Hall was told by Mr. Standish , that by set- 
ting out early in the tnorning, they might reach Rome in 

polere 
three days, passing by Sienna; she left Florence some 

parlire [Gen.) 
weeks ago, and, from what Miss Hartwell has written to 
Mr. Hoppner, whom I saw this moming, it appears she was 
five days on the road — Her daughter presented their son 
with a beautiful edition of Dante bound after the English 
fashion, and he, in his turn, gave her a very handsome 

splendido 
cameo; she was charmed with the present, but her mother 

regalo 
said, that if he had given her a gold watch, it would have 
been more useful to her: the daughter blushed at her mo- 
ther's remark, and immediately took leave of their friends, 

osservazione 
for fear that her mother should say some thing more — 
Those who have not learned to think, those to whom man- 
ual labour leaves no time for meditation, ought never to 
undertake the guidance of their fellow-citizens, by entering 
upon the dilTicult career of government. 



ABBBDVIATIOIV OF ¥r®EEieS. 

The retrenchment of the initial vowel of a word was practised ])y the 
early Italian writers, but has long been disused. The curtailment of a word 
in its terminations is general and common j and seems to be required in many 
cases by the nature of the language. 

In speaking and writing Italian , a vowel is often cut off at the end of 
a word, and sometimes even a consonant along with it. The practice is reg- 
ulated by the following principles. 

A word ending with a vowel may have that vowel curtailed , when il 
is preceded by one of these four liquids , I, ?}i, n, r, 

18* 



— 210 — 



EXAMPLES. 



L after A 

Male . . . mal 
Fatale, fatal 

L after E 

Cielo . . . ciel 
Fedele . . . fedel 



L after 1 

Vile . . . vil 
Gentile . . . gentil 



L after 

Duolo . . . duol 
Figliuolo . . . fi- 
gUuoI 

I after U 

No curtailment 



31 after A 

Diamo . . . diatn 
Amiamo . . . amiani 

M after E 

Diremo . . . direm 
Semo . . . sem 
(poet.) 

31 after I 

fFitk an i before m 
No retrenchment 
is made 

M after 

Uomo . . . uom 



M after U 

No curtailment 



N after A 

Mano . . . man 
InvaDO . . . iavan 

N after E 

Seno . . . sen 
Appieno. . . appien 



N after I 

Vino . . . vin 
Matlino . . . nialtin 



N after 

Suono . . . suon 
Perdono , . . per- 
don 

N after U 

Uno . . . un 
Alcuuo . . . alcuD 



R after A 

Mare . . . mar 
Andare . . . andar 

R after E 

Bere . . . ber 
Pensiere . . . pen- 
sier 

R after I 

Dire . . . dir 
Desire . . . desir 



R after 

Fiore . . . fior 
Dolore . . . dolor 



R after U 

Pure . . . pur 

T/iis is the only- 
word curtail- 
able 



EXCEPTIONS. 



No curtailment can be made in the first person singular of the Indicative: 
therefore, although the substantive perdono may be curtailed, it would be 
wrong to say io perdon for io perdono. There is a single exception from this 
restriction, io son for io sono. 

Nor can any curtailment of a be made in feminine terminations j conse- 
quently. La Roman matronaj Una sol volla, are improper; both writing and 
speaking require. La Romana matronaj Una sola volta. 

Masculine and feminine plurals in ?, are seldom or never cuituilcd, 
unless by poetical licence, which is tolerated rather than approved. 



— 211 — 

Whea a double consonant of the three liquids l^ n^ r, precedes the 
terminating vowel, the entire of the syllable is sometimes retrenched, as in 
the following words: Caval (lo), fiumicel (lo) , vessil (lo), fanciul (lo), 
van (no), andran (no), den (no), in poetry for deggionoj pen (no), for pos- 
sono. Trar (re), seer (re), scior (re), for traere, scegliere, sciogliere. 

But this retrenchment of an entire syllable belongs almost exclusively to 
poetry, with the exception of the third persons plural of verbs as, han, daiij 
fan, san, avran, daran, faran, sapran^ etc. which retrenchments are allowable 
and common even in prose. 

The plural of nouns in Hi is also abbreviated in poetry , but in a diffe- ' 
rent manner : augelli, capelU, for istance , being reduced to augei, capei. 

There are four words subject to curtailment without regard to the fore- 
going rules ; viz — Frate, to Fra, brother j Suora, to Siior, sister j ( mo- 
nastic appellations,) when used in conjunction with a proper name, as Jra 
Giovanni J suor Doroteaj in other cases they are not curtailed j as, Si fece 
frate Minorej La suora disse; nor yet is the former when an appellative 
before a vowels though the latter is; thus yr«r<e Alberto, suor Anastasia. 

Santo, saint, (substantive masculine) to San before a consonant, and 
Sant' brfore a vowel j as , San Francesco, Sant' Antonio, but as an adjective, it 
is not abbreviated , for instance , andarono a Roma per vedere il Santo Pa- 
dre, (the holy father). 

Grande, great, (whether masculine or feminine, singular or plural,) to 
gran before a consonant ; as , gran re, gran reginOj gran cose, before a vowel 
it may either be contracted to grand' or given at fullj as grand' ingiuria or 
grande ingiuria: grand' uomo , or grande uomo, before an initial e, it will 
naturally be contracted , grand' eroe. 

Some other words are also contracted j as, po' from voglios po' from 
poco, fe both from fice and fedej die from diedej pie, from piede. 

In the rapidity of pronunciation , a vowel at the end of a word will 
often be suppressed before another vowel , and many elisions of this kind are 
met with, which come under no rule, being wholly arbitrary, and considered 
merely as a licence of orthography , such as , polrebb' essere, cent' altri, 
sett'anni, poc' anzi, onest' uomo. 

The plural articles deij ai, dai are contracted to de', a', da*, whenever 
expedient, to avoid cacaphony or bad sound ; such, for instance; as, dei rei, 
dei tuoi, dai suoij at which the ear would revolt, and therefore requires 
de' rei, de' tuoi, da' suoi, instead , and so in a numberless variety of instances 
sufficiently perceptible, though less strong. 

By the same rule the plural article when in composition is contracted 
to co'j ne'j pe'j su'_, from coij neij peij sui. 

Two general reslriclions of the licence of abbreviation are , that it cannot " 
take place in words ending in a vowel which is accented, nor yet in any 
word before an s impura, if elision would make such word end in a consonant, 



^ by reason of the harshness which that would produce, as will be perceptible 
in gentil spiritOj far studio j fanciid scosfumatOj stan slretlij San Slefano^ 
gran scogliOj instead of which we must say, at full lenglh, gentile spiritOj 
fare studio j fanciullo scostumatOj stanno slrettij Santo SlefanOj grande sco- 
glio. — If, however, the curtailment will cause the word to end in a vowel, it 
may be made even before s impiira; as, egli e iin po' sliipido : non vo' studiare. 

The elision of the vowel in articles , in che and its compounds ] and 
in monosyllable pronouns, before another vowel , is considered as a mode of 
orthography, rather than an exception to the former of these restrictions. 

The contraction of a word is moreover admissible only when a stress 
or pause does not rest upon such word, but passes over to the nest, as in 
Signor Giovannij sentir dolore; parlar chiaro; uom d' onore; and the same 
in amor lasci^'Oj gran palazzoj direm coslj andiani presto: so that an inver- 
sion of the words would preclude the contraction, and make them necessarily 
become lascivo amorej palazzo grandej cosl diremoj presto andiamo. 

In poetry nevertheless, this rule of restriction is infringed by contractions 
at the end of a verse and of a hemistich : 

Sogna il guerrier le schiere , 
Le solve il cacciator. 

Metastasio. 
Non ne conobbi alcun , ma io m' accorsi 
Che dal cello a ciascun pendea una tasca. 

Dante. 
Cosi all'cgro fanciul porgiamo aspersi 
Di soave licor gli orli del vaso. 

Tasso. 

Il is to be observed that the curtailment of more than a vowel, as in 
fanciulj though permitted in the pause of the hemistich j is never made at 
the end of a phrase. 

Nor will every word termiuating in one of the requisite liquids and a 
vowel bear curtailment, for very many would be thereby rendered extremely 
harsh] for instance, veroj when a substantive, is curtailable, but not when 
an adjective 3 thus we have, non e ver che sia la morte il peggior di tutti i 
malij but we could not endure, queslo e un ver CristianOj for vero Cristiano. 

Thus again , nerOj zerOj amaro and others , cannot be curtailed without 
offence to a delicate ear. 

■W"e may remark, in conclusion, that two out of the three classes of 
words by which Italian prosody is distinguished {parola tronca^ parola pianOj 
parola sdrucciola ) have a change in their prosodaic nature effected by any 
of these abbreviations. 

The first sort , parola troncuj is accented on the last syllable , as mercij 
piela. 



— 213 — 

The second sort, parola pianUj has the accent on the penult or last 
syllable but one, as panCj gentile. 

The third sort, parola sdrucciolaj has the accent on the antepenult or 
last syllable but two , as amanoj, simile. 

Now by any curtailment of the termination, the parola plana becomes 
troncttj, as in pan^ genlilj because the accent then rests on the last syllable; 
and the parola sdrncciola becomes pianaj as in amanj similj because the 
accent then rests on the last syllable but one. 



POETICilLli lilCEIVCC:^* 



Abbo for Ho 

Accdlo jiccoglilo 

Aer Aere 

Aggio,aggi,aggia,aggiate Hoj al/bij, abbiaj abbiate 



Aggiunge'no 


Aggiungevano 


Aggrata 


Jggrada 


Agno 


Agnello 


Aia 


Abbia 


Allolta 


Allora 


Alma 


Anima . 


Amo'e 


Amo 


Andaro, andar, 


andarno Andarono 


Andi 


Vada 


Audi 


Vai 


Andianne 


Andiamocene 


Ange 


Affligge 


Angere 


^ffliggere 


Angue 


Serpente 


Ante, anti 


Avanti 


Appo 


Appresso 


Approcciare 


Appressare 


Arro'gere 


Aggiungere 


Arrdsi 


Aggiunsi 


Ardso 


Aggiunto 


Auge'i 


Aiigelli 


Ausi 


Avvezzi 


Auso 


Ardito 


Ave 


Ha 


Ave'i 


Avevi 



I have 
Receive him 
Air 

I have, have thou, lei him 

have, have you 
They added 
It gratifies 
Lamb 

He may have 
Then 
The soul 
He loved 
They went 
Thou mayst go 
Thou goest 
Let us go away 
He afflicts 
To afflict 
Serpent 
Before 
Near to 
To approach 
To add 
I added 
Added 
Birds 

Accustomed 
Dared 
He has 
Thou hadst 



- 214 - 



Ave' 


for /iceva 


He had 


Av^m 


Abbiamo 


We have 


Avdn 


Avevano 


They had 


Avi^no 


Avevano 


They had 


Avria 


Avrebbe 


He should have 


Batleo 


Batte 


He beat 


Bea 


Beve 


Let him drink 


Bed 


Bevette 


He drank 


Bee 


Beve 


He drinks 


Begli, bei 


Belli 


Fair, beautiful 


Ca 


Casa 


House 


Cad(^o; 


Cadde 


He fell 


Caggio, Caggia 


CadOj Cada 


I fdll, that he may fall 


Caggiamo 


. Cadiamo 


We fall 


Cano 


Canulo 


Old 


Cansare 


Discostare 


To retire from 


Capea 


Capiva, or conteneva 


He contained 


Capegli or capei 


Capelli 


Hairs 


Carco 


Carico 


Charged 


Carme 


Verso 


Verse 


Cariin 


Caronte 


Charon 


Catto 


Preso 


Taken 


Cavai 


Cava Hi 


Horses 


Cavo 


Cava to 


Taken off 


Cavdi 


Cavolli 


He took them away 


Ce'Ie 


Cela 


He hides or conceals 


Celan 


Celano 


They hide 


Cel'han (mandalo) 


CeVhanno (mandato) 


They have sent it to u 


Cen 


Ce ne 


Tons of it 


Chfe 


Perche 


Because 


Chere 


Chiede 


He demands 


China 


Chinata 


A bending down 


Chiao 


China to 


Bent down 


Give 


Cittadino 


Citizen 


Co 


Capo 


End 


Cola 


Venera 


He venerates 


Colo 


Venero 


I venerate 


Coltei 


Coltelli 


Knives 


Com*, como 


Come 


As 


Concipio 


Concepisco 


I conceive 


Conface 


Corn'iene 


It is necessary 


Convenette 


Convenm 


It was necessary 


Cor or corre 


Coglierc 


To gather 



213 



Correm 


for Coglieremo 


We shall gather 


Costar or costaro 


Costarono 


They cost 


Crederia 


Crederebbe 


He should believe 


De'a 


Dia 


He may give 


Oeano 


Diano 


They may give 


Debbia or deggia 


Debba 


He may ow3 


Deggiatno 


Dobbiamo 


We may owe 


Deggio or deo 


Devo 


1 owe 


Deggi 


Devi 


Thou owest 


De' or de 


Deve 


He owes 


Den, denno, dienno, 


Debbono 


They owe 


deggiono deono 






Dicestu ? 


Dicesti tu ? 


Saidst thou? 


Die 


D\ or giorno 


Day 


Diemi 


Mi diede 


He gave to me 


Die'ro or dier 


Diedero 


They gave 


DieroDsi 


Si diedero 


They gave or applied ihem 
selves to 


Die 


Diede 


He gave 


Differlo 


Differito 


Deferred 


Do' 


Dove 


Where 


Domo 


Domato 


Tamed 


Dovemo 


Dobbiamo 


We owe 


Ee 


i: 


Heii 


E' or ei 


Eglij or eglino 


He, they 


E'l 


Ed il 


And the 


Ello, EUi 


Eglij eglino 


He, they 


Elicere 


CavarCj Eslrarre 


To draw 


Empio 


Ernpi 


He filled 


En, enno 


Sono 


They are 


Eo 


lo 


I 


Esse 


Essere 


To be 


Essi 


Sie 


It is 


Esto Esti, Esta Este 


Questo questij questa 
queste 


This, these 


Esterefallo 


Spaventato 


Frightened 


Face'an 


Facevano 


They did do 


Face 


Fa 


He does or makes 


Falle 


Fallisce 


He deceives 


Fe 


Fede 


Faith 


Fe' 


Fece 


He did or made 


Fea 


Faceva 


He did or made 


Feda 


Sozza 


Dirty 



216 — 



Fe'i 


for Feci 


I ^id or made 


Fein 


Li fee e 


He made them 


Fe'mnio 


Fncemmo 


We made 


Fenne 


Ne fece 


He made some, or of it, of 
ihem etc. 


Feo 


Fece 


He made 


Fe'ra 


Fiera_, ferisca 


Eeast, he may strike 


Ferci 


Cifecp.ro 


They made us 


Fer, or fero 


Fecero 


They made 


Ferrer e 


Ferire 


To strike 


Fermo 


Fermalo 


Stopped 


Ferno 


Fecero 


They made 


Ferono 


Feriscono 


They strike 


Fero 


Ferisco 


I strike 


Fero 


Fiero 


Cruel 


■>»». Ferute 


Feritc 


Wounds 


Fesse, fe'ssero 


FacessCj facessero 


He might make, they might 
make 


Fesse 


Taglib 


He cut oflF 


Fi'an or fieno 


Saranno 


They will he 


Fiata 


Voha 


Time 


Fie or fia 


Sara 


He shall he 


Fieda or Fifggia 


Ferisca 


That he may strike 


Fie'dere 


Ferire 


To strike 


Fiede 


Ferisce 


He strikes 


Fie'do 


Ferisco 


I strike 


Fie'dono 


Feriscono 


They strike 


Fie'rere 


Ferire 


To strike 


Fie're 


Ferisce 


He strikes 


Fie'rono 


Feriscono 


They strike 


Fieti 


Ti sara 


He shall be to thee 


Fiollo 


Fluilo 


The wave 


Fora 


Sarehbe 


He should he 


Fo'ran 


Sarehbero 


They should he 


Fore 


Fiirono 


They were 


Fossino 


Fossero 


They were or might he 


Fra 


Frate 


A brother or friar 


Frene 


Frena 


He represses 


Fue 


Fu 


He was 


Furo 


Fiirono and ladro 


They were; robber 


Fusse 


Fosse 


He might be 


Gaude 


Code 


He enjoys 


Gcna 


Guancia 


Cheek 



~ 217 



Gia 


for Andava 


Giacea, giacean 


Giaceva, giacevano 


Gimo 


Andiamo 


Gimmo 


Andammo 


Gir or giro 


Andarono 


Giro, girai 


Andrb, andrai 


Gite 


Andate 


Giuso 


Giic 


Giva 


Andava 


Guata 


Guarda 


Haia 


Tu ahbia 


Halle 


Le ha 


Halmi {delta) 


Me Vha (detto) 


Havvi 


Vi ha or vi e 


Arei 


Avrei 


Hdlle 


Le Tio 


Honne 


Neho 


1' 


lo 


Inlo 


Nello 


Iqsuso 


Jnsu 


Ir 


Andare 


Ita 


SI 


Ite 


Andate 


Ivan 


Andavano 


Labbia 


Visa 


La ve 


La dove 


Lece 


Lice 


Leggiavani 


Leggevamo 


Len' 


Gliene 


Lettre 


Lettere 


Letane 


Litanie 


Levdrsi 


Levaronsi 


Lici 


Li 


Licito 


Lecito 


Linci 


Di quindi 


Lodar, or loddro 


Lodarono 


Lome 


Litme 


Liicere 


Riliicere 


Lunge 


Lontano 


Maggio 


Maggiore 


Me' 


Meglio 


Medemo or medesmo 


Medesimo 


Men' 


Mene 



He did go 

He lies down, Ihey lie down 

We go 

We went 

They went 

I shall go ; thou shall go 

You go 

Below, Down 

J, or he did go 

He looks 

Thou may'st have 

He has them 

He has told it to me 

There is 

I should have 

I have them 

I have some or of it 

I 

In the 

About 

Togo 

Yes 

Go you 

They went 

Face 

There where 

It is permitted 

We did read 

To him, or to her of it 
Letters 

Prayers 

They got up 

There 
Permitted 
From where 
They praised 
Light 
To shine 
Far 

Greater 
Better 
The same 
Me some or of it 
19 



- 218 — 



Men 

Menre'nli 

Merro 

Merigge 

Misso 

Mo 

Mo'lcere 

Morroe 

Morio 

Namorato 

Nanti, or nanzi 

Ned 

Ne'l 

Noi 

Nosco 

Nui 

Omai 

Onrato 

Or 

Orranza 

Orrevole 

Ov' 

Par 

Parfio 

Pave 

Pentulo 

Pie 

Ponno 

Potria 

Por 

Preco 

Preco 

Pre nee 

Puone 

Puole or puole 

Qua' 

Quai 

Que' 

Quia 

Quiaci 

Raplo 

Reina 

Retro 



for Bleno 

Ti meneremo 

Condtirrb 

Mezzo giorno 

Messo 

Ora 

Addolcire 

Morro 

Mori 

Innamoraio 

Innanzi 

m 
mu 

/Innoi 

Con noi 

Noi 

Oramai 

Onorato 

Ora, Ore 

Onoranza 

Oncrevole 

Dove 

Pare 

Parti 

Pai'enta 

Pcnlito 

Piede 

Possono 

Potrebbe 

Porre 

Preghiera 

lo prego 

Principe 

Pud 

Pub 

Quali 

Quali 

Quelli 

Percke 

Qui 

Rapi 

Regina 

Dielro 



Less 

"VVe Tvill conduct thee 
I will conduct 
Mid-day, noon 
Put 
Now 

To assuage 
I shall die 
He died 

Enamoured or in love 
Before 
Nor 

Neither the 
Thou tirest 
With us 
We, us 

Now, For the fuliire 
Honoured 
Now, Gold 
Esteem 
Honourable 
Where 
It seems 
He went away 
He fears 
Repented 
A foot 
They can 
He should be able 
To put 
Prayer 
I pray 
Prince 
He can 
He can 
Which 
Which 
Those 

For, because 
Here 

He ravished 
Queen 
After 



— 219 — 



Riede 


for Ritorna 


Ritdr 


Ritogliere 


Roggio 


Rosso 


Rompre 


Rompere 


Rdppe 


Ruppe 


Skllo 


Lo sa 


Saisi 


Salii 


Salse 


Sail 


Satti 


Tisa 


Se' 


Sei 


Sem, Semo 


Siamo 


Sete 


Siete 


Sbl 


Selo 


Solvere 


Slegare 


Soluto 


Slegato 


Speglio 


Specchio 


Spene, or spcme 


Speranza 


Spirlo 


Spirito 


Sta 


Questa 


Sle' 


Stette 


Stingue 


Estingue 


S' lu 


Setu 


Sui 


Suoi 


Summo 


Sommo 


Suggere 


Sorgere 


Sursi 


Sorsi 


Surto 


Sorto 


Suso, iue 


Su 


Tai 


Tali 


Te' 


Tieni 


Tie'nlo 


Tienilo 


Tcrrallo 


Lo terra 


Tommi 


Toglimi 


Tange 


Tocca 


Tomi 


Scenda 


Tosla 


Pronta 


Trade 


Tradiscc 


U' or 've 


Dove 


Udil 


Lo lull 


Unqua 


Mai 


Uscien 


Uscivano 


Valso 


ValiUo 


Ve' or vci 


Vedi 



He returns 

To resume 

Red 

To break 

He broke 

He knows it 

I went up 

He went up 

Dost thou recollect 

Thou art 

We are 

You are 

To himself it 

To loosen 

Loosened 

Looking-glass 

Hope 

A spirit 

This 

He stood 

He extinguishes 

If thou 

His, her, her's, it* 

Great 

To rise 

I rose 

Risen 

About 

Such 

Hold thou 

Hold thou it 

He will hold it 

Take me away 

It touches 

He may descend 

Speedy, Immediate 

He betrays 

Where 

He heard him, or it 

Ever 

They did go out 

Been worth 

See thou 



— 220 



Veglio 


for Vecchio 


Vegna, Vegne 


Venga 


Vel 


Oj or velo 


Ve'lle 


Volere 


Velle 


Vedih 


Velli 


Vedili 


Velio 


Eccolo 


Ven 


Vene 


Vene'sse 


Venisse 


Ver 


Verso 


Vincia 


Vinceva 


Vincia 


Circondava 


Vittrice 


Vincitrice 


Vivem, Vive'mo 


Vi\>iamo 


Vo'. 


Voglio 


Vdllo 


Voltato 


Volse 


Voile 


Vosco 


Con voi 


Volvere 


Volgere 


Vui 


Voi 


Vudii or vuogli 


Vuoi 



An old man . 

He may come 

Or, or veil 

To he willing 

See thou them 

See thou them 

Thei'e he is 

You some or of it 

He might come 

Towards 

He conquered 

It surrounded 

Conqueror 

We live 

I will 

Turned 

He wished 

With you 

To turn 

You 

Wilt thou 



r 



Observe that the third persons plural of the preterite past terminating 
in aronoj as, legarono, aniarono etc. are to have their poetical terminations 
in aro : thus they say legaro, amaro etc. 

The poets always retrench an / from the articles dello, delta, delfij 
dellej alii J all e etc. and from nella, nellij nelle: colla, colle: hence they put 
de loj de la, de li etc. ne luj ne lis Co la, co le etc. 

They likewise use il before verbs instead of loj as il vcdo for lo vedoj 
il diceva for lo dicei'a. 

Remember also that the poets more frequently use the verbs in gio, than 
those in doj, when they have two terminations; thus they write veggio oftener 
than vedoj veggendo more usually than vedendo. 



JLttltlTIOIV OF A. I.ETTER TO ^n'ORniS. 

By an opposite licence, a vowel is sometimes added to words, but this 
licence is very confined 

When a word ending in a consonant, as per, con_, in, non etc. is fol- 
lowed by one beginning with an s impura, an i may be prefixed to the lalter 
for the sake of softening the sound, and thus instead of con slcnto, in slrada, 
per shaglio, non scorgo, it is more elegant to say, con istcntOj in istrada, 
per isbaglioj non iscorgo. 




— 221 — 

Wben the vowels , a^ e_, o are immediately followed by a -word begiu- 
niug with a vowel, a d is commoDly joined to them, in order to prevent the 
hiatus that would arise from such concourse of vowels j for instance ad amar' 
si, ed essere, od enore. 

ACCJEMTS. 

la writing Italian the following marks or accents are used. 
• 1? accento acuta, ( ) the acute accent, is placed over a vowel in words 
whose meaning varies with a difference of accentuation, which falls upon that 
vowel when marked; as Bulla ^ power, to distinguish it from Balia, nurse. 

L' accenlo grave (") the grave accent is placed upon the terminating 
vowel of every polysyllable word when that vowel is accented in pronunciationj 
as, Carila, merce, pero, virli\. 

It is accordingly used in the parts of verbs so accented, viz. in ihe third 
person singular of the preterite, and first and third persons singular of the 
future Indicative] as, parloj teme, sentlj parlero, parleraj temerb, temeraj 
senliro, sentira. 

Monosyllables consisting of two vowels, which make a diphthong, take 
this accent over the last vowel , as , gia, pie, cib, giu. 

It is also taken by monosyllables having a single vowel, to discriminate 
the sense in which they are then employed from a different sense which they 
bear without the accent. 

from E 

Che 

Di 

Se 
Si 

La 



E 




(yerb) 


Is 


Che 




{conj.) 


Because 


Di 


! 


{subst.) 
(ferb) 


Day 
Tell 


Se 




(pron.) 


Him 


Si 




(adi>.) 
(conj.) 


Yes 
So 


L'a 
Li 




{Adv.) 


There 



{conj.) 


And 


{pron.) 


That 


{prep.) 


Of 


{conj.) 


If 


(pron.) 


Him 


(art.) or (pr 


.) The 




Her. It 


(pron.) 


Them 


(pron.) 


Us 



Li 

Ne {conj.) Nor Ne 

La dieresi, {" ) dieresis, has been adopted to distinguish those words 
in which ie and io are separate syllables , from other words in which those 
two vowels are blended into a diphthong; as, Conveniente, furioso,, orlentej 
punizione. 

These three different accents or marks do not prescribe any variety of 
pronunciation. 

L' aposlrofej ( ) the apostrophe, is a mark of contraction common in 
all the modern European languages to denote the elision of a vowel. Its 
employment in Italian, which is chiefly with the article, has been already 
rendered familiar. 

19* 



— 222 — 

DIFFEREHIT FORMS OF COKCLUDIKO LETTERS. (I) 



Piu non mi resta a desiderare, se terrete per fermo cbe I'o non sono 
secondo tra coloro che hanno per voi la piii decisa stima e la piu sentita 
venerazione. Sono 

Di Firenze il 15 di seUembre 1843 

U Vostro 
K. N. 
Continuatemi la vostra amicizia, e sialevi certo che moltissimo 1' ap- 
prezzo, perche carissima oltre ogni dire al 

Vostro Tenero 
N. N. 
Non posso lusingarmi che la riconoscenza mia possa uguagliare mai la 
bonta vostra 3 ma siate persuaso ch'essa sara elerua quanto 1' affezione colla 
quale mi protesto 

Tutto Vostro 
N. N. 
Vog'iale andar persuaso che la vostra amicizia e un' idea necessaria alia 
conlentezza della vita del 

Vostro Tenero 
N. N. 
Le prove di affezione che da voi ricevo mi sono ben care, e mi e gralo 
il polervi rinnovare 1' alteslato della mia deferenza, mentre mi confermo 

Tutto Vostro 
N. N. 
Nulla mi resta a desiderare , se vi degnate accogliere 1' espressione del- 
I'affelto con quella sincerita con che ve I'offre chi gode ripetersi 

L' Affezionatissimo Vostro 
N. N. 
Mi auguro che in voi sia lania disposizione a comandarmi, quanta io 
ne ho per servirvi, e qui passo a protestarmi 

Tutto Vostro 
N. N. 
Siate voi lucganieute e coslantemente felfce, come io sono, e saro 
sempre 

Tullo Vostro 
N. N. 

(I) Observe lliat the llaliani put the date at the cud of the letter , as mav be seen iu the first ul 
these cuuclusions. 



— 223 — 

Vi sapro grado di ogni officio pralicato in queslo proposilo, come di 
favore compartito a me, che souo e saro sempre con tutlo I'animo 

U Voslro 
N. N. 
Ella mi abbia sempre per quello che sono veracemente, e qui col piii 
profondo ossequio m'iochino, e nella protezione mi raccomando 
Dell' Eccellenza Vostra 

Rispettosissimo Servitore 
N. N. 
Godo di aver quest' occasione per richiamare alia meraoria vostra quegli 
antichi e costanti segui di osservanza, e di stima, con che sono veracemente 

N. N. 
Spero che per dissentire da voi in cio non vorrete dissentire dall' ani- 
mo, ch'e per voi tutta stima, osservanza, e propensione la piu sincera ed 
afFeltuosa. Vale 

N. N. 
lo poi non so come ricarabiare tanta bonta, e sol mi resta la lusinga 
ch'Ella voglia onorarmi de' pregiali Suoi comandi, onde per tal modo possa 
comprovarle col fatto ch' io sono , e saro sempre 

L' Umilissimo Suo Servitore 
N. N. 
Tenete per fermo che non v' ha cosa di cui si allamenle mi corapiaccia , 
quanto dell' addimostrarmi 

Vostro Affezionalissimo 
N. N. 
La continuazione delle vostre bonta, Signora, fara sempre la gloria e 
la felicita del 

Vostro Umilissimo Servitore 
N. N. 
Addio, mio caro Giovanni, procuratemi sovente 1' occasione di provarvi 
che voi non avete miglior amico del 

* Vostro Tenero 

N. N. 
Veuile dunque ch' io vi altendo con lutta la impazienza che puo inspi- 
rare la perfella amicizia che conservera sempre per voi 

II Vostro 
N. N. 
Non havvi distanza cui 1' amicizia non avvicini, e da vicino come da 
lontano la mia sara sempre per voi tenera quanto sincera 

II Voslro 
N. N. 
II vostro deslino e di £arvi ammirare ovunque vi Irovate; il mio e di 
amarvi sempre con una lenerezza senza pari. Addio 

II Vostro 
N. N. 



224 - 



lo conto assai sulla voslra amicizia , per iion temere che mi rifiuliatc 
questa grazia, cioe giudico dal cuor voslro secondo quello del voslro sincero, 
e lenero amico 

N. N. 
Diteml francamente cio che posso fare per voi, tnia F: tulto quello che 
si puo sperare dal piii affezionato cuore, voi avete diritto d'«ispettarlo dal 

Voslro Sincero 
N. N. 
Se i! divider gli affanni voi credete che possano addolcirsi, confidateli a 
me, nessuno puo esservi piu disposlo dell' 

Affezionatissimo Voslro 
N. N. 
Sliamo immobili nel desiderare il Lene e oell'amarci, ne.... ne.... eel 
possono impedire. Amiamoci , io vi amo , e vi amero sempre. Addio 

■ Il Voslro 
N. N. 
Se allro accadra il comune noslro Amico N. vi fara avvisato, e quan- 
d' anche allro non accadesse , ad ogni modo desiderera sempre di farvi cosa 
utile e grata 

11 Voslro 
N. N. 
Amatemi secondoche io vi amo ch' e sommamente. Addio 

11 Vostro 
N. N. 
Non crediate, mia cara N., di fare un ingralo a forzajdi amarmi, perche 
il piu dolce mio piacere sara sempre il contraccambiarvi colla piu dolce tene- 
rezza. Sono 

11 Vostro 
N. N. 
Piu vi conosco, piu vi stimo, e piu mi glorio d'essere 

II Vostro 
N. N. 
Salutate per me i vostri, scrivetemi presto, ed amatemi siccome vi amo, 
cioe senza fine. Addio. 

11 Vostro 
N. N. 
Tenetemi fra' vostri cari, ch' io v' ho fra' carissimi. Addio 

L' Affezionatissimo Voslro 
N. N. 
Non mi ringraziate, mia cara M.: io all'opposto sono a voi obbligalo ogni 
qual volta mi procurate 1' occasione di provarvi che la mia amicizia e per voi 
Icnera quanlo sincera. Addio 

11 Voslro 
N. N. 



— 225 — 

Addio, mia cara Madre, io vi amo quanto posso, perche ell' e itnpossi- 
bile cosa 1' amarvi quanto meritate. 

La Vostra AfFezionatissima Figlia 
N. N. 
Se prima non vi ho scritto, voi ne sapete la cagione: e gia senza pure 
ch'io vi scriva , sapete come sempre sediale in cima de' raiei pensieri — Addio 

II Vostro Tenero 
N. N. 



ADDRESSES OF LETTERS 

To a CaYdxuol To au AtcKVisUo^ oy B\s\\oip 



A Sua Eminenza Rev^", 
II Cardinale N. 

To a Cauou 



AW Iir\ e Re\r\ Monsig'\ 
Arcivescovo or Vescovo di iV. 

To a PtusY 



Al Molto Illustre e Rv^'. Sig'\ 
11 Sig. Canonico N, N. 



Al molto Rev^\ S ignore 
II Sif Abate N. N. 



To a Pnuce, aud a DuUe, uoY q\ "^oi^oV B\ood 



A Sua Eccellenza 
II Principe N. 



A Sua Eccellenza 
II Duca N, 



To oue 0^ tUm loYo\)\e,Ts ov cUddxeu 



Al Nobil Uomo 

II Sig''\ E. del Principi N. 

To a Mxms\M' o^ S\aU 

A Sua Eccellenza 

II Sig''\ N. iV. Consigliere 

di Sua Altezza I. e R. il 

Duca di N. 



Alia Nobile Donna 

La Sig""^, Anna dei Duchi iV. 

To a GoAitTuoY 

Air Iir\ Sig'\ Pro'''. CoV'", 
Il Sig''\ N. iV. Governatore 
diN, 



226 — 




To a MaTc^xvVs 

All Iir\ Signore, or 

Al Nohil Vomo 

II Sig'\ Marchese N. N, 



To an Eatl 



AlV Iir\ Signore, or 

Al Nobil Vomo 

II Sig'\ Conte N. N. 




To out 0^ S\\m VvoWveYs ot cAiWdvtu 




Al Nobil Uomo 

IlSig''- P. dei Marchesi N. 

To a l^uVg^Wl 

Al Nobil Uomo 

II Sig'\ Cavaliere N. N. 

To a GtwWtmaw 



Alia Nobil Donna 

La Sig''". Maria dei Conti N, 

To a Pyo^^ssov 

Al Chiarissimo Signore 
II Sig'\ Professore N. N. 

To a Mts. 



All* Egregio Signore 
II Sig'' N. N. 

To aw A.d\3oaaU 

Air nr\ signore 

II Sig^\ Avvocato N. N. 

To au AyVisI 

Al Merilissimo Signore 
11 Sig'\ N N. 



Air Ornalissima Signora 
La Sig'\ N, N. 

To a "vjouw^ Lad^i 

Alia Gentile Donzella 
La Sig'\ N. N. 

To a "WoYkmevu 
Al Signor N. N. 



The End. 



-^ 227 — ■ 



(S(£)srsas?^3» 



Preface Page 1 

Italian Alphabet and Pronun- 
ciation 3 

Lesson I. — Parts of Speech . . 4 

Nouns Substantive Ibid. 

Genders 5 

Number 7 

Lesson H. — Article 11 

Definite Article Ibid. 

Partitive Article 16 

Indefinite Article Ibid. 

Marks used in the Exercises ... 18 

Exercise 1 Ibid. 

Lesson III. — Adjective .... 20 

Exercise 2 21 

Lesson IV. — Comparatives and 

Superlatives 22 

Adjectives Irregular in their 
Comparatives and Superlatives. 26 

Exercise 3 27 

Lesson V. — Cardinal and Ordi- 
nal Numbers 28 

Collective Numbers 29 

Distributive Numbers 30 

Exercise 4 32 

Lesson V I. — Variable Nouns. . 33 

Augmentatives 34 

Diminutives Ibid. 

Vilifying Nouns 35 

Exercise 5 Ibid. 

Lesson VII. — Pronouns .... 37 
Personal and Conjunctive Pro- 
nouns Ibid. 

Exercise 6 46 

Lesson VIII. ■ — Personal and 
Conjunctive Pronouns conti- 
nued 48 

Compound Conjunctive Pronouns 53 

Exercise 7 54 

Lesson IX. — Possessive Pro- 
nouns 55 



Exercise 8 Page 60 

Exercise 9 02 

Lesson X. — Demonstrative Pro- 
nouns 63 

Exercise 10 67 

Lesson XI. — Relative and In- 
terrogative Pronouns 69 

Relative Ibid. 

Interrogative 71 

Exercise 11 72 

Lesson XII. — Indefinite Pro- 
nouns 74 

Invariable Pronouns Ibid. 

Exercise 12 78 

Lesson XIII. — Indefinite Pro- 
nouns continued 79 

Exercise 13 83 

Verb 84 

Conjugations of the Auxiliary 

Verbs Avere and Essere. . . 87 
Inflexions of the Regular Verbs. 

First Conjugation 90 

Second Conjugation 91 

Third Conjugation 1st Class. . . 92 
Third Conjugation 2d Class. . . 93 
Explanations relating to the Ta- 
bles of Irregular Verbs. ... 94 
Terminations of irregular Verbs. 97 
Second Conjugation. ...... Ibid. 

Third Conjugation 99 

Irregular Verbs of the first Conju- 
gation . 100 

Irregular Veibs of tbe Second 

Conjugation 102 

Irregular Verbs of the Third 

Conjugation 130 

Lesson XIV. — Observations on 
JVouId, Should, Could, Ought 

and Might 143^ 

Agreement of the Verb with tbe 

subject 144 



— 228 — 



Indicalive Mood Page 145 

Exercise 14 148 

Lesson XV. — Subjunctive Mood. 149 

Exercise 15 154 

Lesson XVI. — Infinitive Mood. 155 

Exercise 16 161 

Lesson XVII. — Gerund and 

Participle 162 

Gerund Ibid. 

Participle 163 

Participle Present Ibid. 

Participle Past. 164 

Exercise 17 166 

Lesson XVIII. — Of the Passive 

and the particle Si 167 

Exercise 18 ... 171 

Lesson XIX. — Verbs taking dif- 
ferent auxiliaries 172 

In transitive Verbs conjugated with 

Avere 174 

IntransitiveVerbs conjugated with 

Essere Ibid. 

Impersonal Verbs conjugated with 

Essere 175 

Intransitive Verbs coujugated with 

both Essere and Avere .... Ibid. 
Impersonal Verbs conjugated with 
both Essere and Avere . . . 176 

Exercise 19 Ibid. 

Lesson XX. — Verbs governing 

different cases 177 

Verbs always governing the Ge- 
nitive Ibid. 

Verbs always governing the Da- 
live .179 

The following take the Dative 
of the person and the Ac- 
cusnlivc of the thing 180 



The following govern different 
cases or prepositions. . . Page 180 

Exercise 20 182 

Exercise 21 183 

Lesson XXI. — Adverb 184 

Adverbs and adverbial expres- 
sions 185 

Adverbs denoting- locality in a . 
manner corresponding with the 
three classes of demonstrative 

Pronouns 190 

Exercise 22 191 

Lesson XXII. — Preposition . . 192 
Particular rules for the use 

oi Da Ibid. 

Particular rules for the use 

oi Per 194 

Prepositions with the cases they 

govern 196 

Exercise 23 197 

Lesson XXIII. — Conjunction . 199 

Exercise 24 201 

Lesson XXIV. — Conjunctions 
governing the Subjunctive 

Mood 202 

Remarks on Se 203 

Exercise 25 205 

Lesson XXV. — Interjection . . 206 

Exercise 26 207 

Recapitulatory Exercise 208 

Abbreviation of words 209 

Exceptions 210 

Poetical Licences . 213 

Addition of a letter to words. . . 220 

Accents 221 

Different forms of concluding 

Letters 222 

Addresses of Letters 225 



^ 





-=iS-r®-©-. 



FZiOEEtfCE 

Printed by Felix Lo Monoier. 





i«l 



k 



1 

I 



< 



I 



v 



fl 




Library of Congress 
Branch Bindery, 1902 



LIBRARY O 



F CONGRESS % 




022 211 951 






-■ ■• ^ , 
'i '*■ 



^?^^..;r^^^ 






■.-•■;: • 'i'^^ ••-■ 










'4..- .'»— f*- '. 



,. »» I 



*4' 



